JP6635703B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a slot machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, for example, a slot machine is known as a gaming machine in which a spinning reel is stopped and displayed by a stop operation by a player, and control relating to the progress of the game is performed based on a symbol combination at the time of the stop display. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the slot machine described in Patent Literature 1, it is general that a game is started by medal insertion and credit expenditure, a start lever is operated, and a game is advanced by pressing a stop button.

JP-A-2002-078851

By the way, although it is common for a gaming machine to repeat a game, it is monotonous just to repeat the game, and various effects are performed during the game to maintain interest.

However, since the game becomes monotonous in a gaming machine with a lack of devising effects, it is required to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and has as its object to suppress a decrease in interest.

A specific operation means for executing a game, a first display means for performing a display for prompting a specific operation of the specific operation means, a lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a benefit advantageous to a player, and the lottery Means for granting the privilege when a lottery result for granting the privilege is obtained by means, and a movable body, wherein the first display means is provided with a location before the prompting is performed. A fixed display mode is displayed on a second display device different from the first display device, and when the privilege is provided by the privilege provision device, the display prompting the first display device is displayed. as a pattern of a predetermined display mode of the second display means to be performed, the display mode before Kisho constant is performed in a long second time than the pattern and the first time carried out in the first hour pattern There is a door, said Even if the pattern of the predetermined display mode of the second display means until the prompting display is performed on the first display means is a pattern performed in the first time, it is a pattern performed in the second time. Also, the predetermined display mode displayed on the second display means changes before the time until the prompting display is performed on the first display means changes, and the first display means displays Whether the pattern of the predetermined display mode of the second display means until the prompting display is performed is the pattern performed in the first time or the pattern performed in the second time, If the pattern of the predetermined display mode of the display means is the first time, the first time has elapsed, and if the pattern of the predetermined display mode of the second display means is the second time, the second time has elapsed. At a later time, The possible to maintain the results of the lottery drawing means and then, the provided with a plurality longer second time than the first hour, the third display different from the first display means and the second display means has Means for changing the display mode on the third display means in accordance with the predetermined display mode displayed on the second display means, and the prompting is performed on the first display means. A game machine capable of moving the movable body at a predetermined timing until the game machine.

  According to the present invention, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine showing a state where the door-shaped front member is omitted. It is a perspective view of a general slot machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door-shaped front member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a Z1 part of FIG. 4. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a Z1 part of FIG. 4 showing a state in which a connector holder is moved. It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state where the door-shaped front member is omitted. (A) is an enlarged view of a Z2 part of FIG. 7, and (b) is an enlarged view of a Z2 part of FIG. 7 showing a state where a connector holder is moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side. It is an exploded perspective view of a case member. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from the back. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of the case member explaining the temporary fixing state of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is the front view which omitted the cover body of the wiring relay member. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of a stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of a stopper showing other forms. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is a partial perspective view of the design change display device which shows other forms of a handle. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the relationship between the case member and the stopper of the outer main body side. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol variation display device. FIG. 3 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine. FIG. 19 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine without the medal discharge device. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26. It is the rear view which looked at the heat dissipation opening from the back side of the slot machine. It is a partial cross-sectional partial front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view showing the state where the power supply device was looked up from below. FIG. 9 is a sectional view of a main part of a side plate of an outer main body and a power supply device, which shows another embodiment. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. It is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member which disassembles and shows a transparent plate and a light emitting unit. It is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member which disassembles and shows a transparent plate. FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view of a door-shaped front member to which a transparent plate is attached, corresponding to the line of FIG. 33A-A. It is a disassembled and assembled perspective view of a hinge fitting. It is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing a door-shaped front member. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the principal part showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the back which shows the upper half part of a door type front member. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the connection tool in the longitudinal direction. It is a principal part cross-sectional plan view of the door type front member which shows the example of another hinge fitting. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member of FIG. 42 in the middle of opening. It is a perspective view showing the state where the image display and the frame member were opened in the model unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the door-shaped front member with the connection tool connected. It is a perspective view of the slot machine of this embodiment. It is the development view which developed the symbol row of the reel band in plane. It is an enlarged view of the symbol display window 401 part. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like provided in the slot machine. It is a correspondence table showing a combination mode of symbols corresponding to each winning combination in the present game and its gaming privilege. It is a figure which shows each winning combination in this game, and this condition apparatus established corresponding to each of these winning combinations. It is a figure which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each main condition apparatus, and the payout number of medals. FIG. 53 is a view continued from FIG. 52, showing a combination of symbols and the number of medals paid out corresponding to each condition device. FIG. 54 is a diagram continued from FIG. 53, showing combinations of symbols and the number of medals paid out corresponding to each main condition device. FIG. 3 is a diagram simply illustrating a basic processing procedure of one game in the slot machine 1. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process performed by CPU mounted in the main board. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the process at the time of bonus winning. It is a figure showing an example of the navigation lottery table used for privilege game type judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the privilege game process performed by CPU mounted in the main board. It is a table showing an example of an end condition of each privilege game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the privilege game setting process performed by CPU mounted in the main board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a bonus game end determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal game or ART game processing performed by CPU mounted in the main board. FIG. 64 is a flowchart continued from FIG. 63 and is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base game or ART game process executed by a CPU mounted on a main board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BET processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the betting number setting process at the time of medal insertion. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd MAX input button production judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of gaseous second MAX input button production judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st MAX throw button production judgment processing. 6 is a time chart showing a relationship between pressing of a MAX input button and lighting of a BET lamp. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between insertion of a medal and lighting of a BET lamp. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between insertion of a medal and lighting of a BET lamp. It specifically shows an internal lottery process executed by the CPU mounted on the main board. It is an example of a table used for a pseudo game execution lottery. It is an example of a table used for a precursor game number lottery. It is an example of a table used for a pseudo lottery. It is a table which shows each winning pseudo combination in the pseudo game, and a pseudo condition device which is established corresponding to each winning pseudo combination. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the reel control processing performed in a main board. 6 is an example of a flowchart showing a pseudo game process executed on a main board. It is an example of a table used for in-game continuation lottery / pseudo game loop lottery. It is an example of a flowchart showing a pseudo game reel swinging process executed by the main board. It is an example of a flowchart showing the present game processing executed on the main board. It is an example of a table used for a reel effect lottery performed according to the type of the bonus game estimated in the bonus game type determination processing. It is an example of the flowchart which shows this game reel stop processing performed by the main board. It is an example of a flowchart showing the present game symbol determination processing. It is an example of a flowchart showing a BB game start process. It is an example of a flowchart showing a BB game end determination process. It is an example of a flowchart showing an RB game start process. It is an example of a flowchart showing an RB game end determination process. It is an example of a table used for a bonus game addition lottery process.

  Before describing the embodiment, a slot machine as a general game machine will be described as an example with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4, FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4 showing a state where the connector holder is moved, and FIG. FIG. 8 (a) is an enlarged view of a Z2 part of FIG. 7, and FIG. 8 (b) is an enlarged view of a Z2 part of FIG. 7 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved. 9 is an enlarged view showing a main part of FIG. 8A, FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of a main part of the slot machine showing a back plate side, FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a case member, and FIG. FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) show the temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of a wiring relay member, FIG. 15 is a front view of the wiring relay member with a cover body omitted, FIGS. 16 and 17 are exploded perspective views of a connector holder, 18 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another embodiment, FIGS. 20 and 21 are cross-sectional views of main parts showing a guide structure of the case member, and FIG. 23 is a partial perspective view of the symbol variation display device showing the form of FIG. 23, FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a main part showing the relationship between the case member and the stopper on the outer body side, and FIG. 24 is the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol variation display device. 25 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal ejection device omitted, FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Figure 28 is behind the slot machine 29 is a rear view of the heat sink, FIG. 29 is a partial cross-sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the power supply viewed from below, and FIG. 31 shows another embodiment. In FIG. 32 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a lighting device showing another embodiment of the side plate of the outer main body and the power supply device, FIG. 33 is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member shown by disassembling a transparent plate and a light emitting unit, 34 is an exploded perspective view of a door-shaped front member showing a transparent plate, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of a door-shaped front member with a transparent plate taken along line A-A of FIG. 33, and FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings, FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part showing a door-shaped front member, and FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part showing a door-shaped front member being opened. 40 is a perspective view showing the upper half of the door-shaped front member viewed from the back side, and FIG. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional perspective view of an essential part of a door-shaped front member showing an example of another hinge fitting, and FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of an essential part of the door-shaped front member of FIG. FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front opening / closing member is opened in the model unit, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened with the connecting member connected.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 has a box-shaped outer main body 100 having an open front surface, and is rotatably mounted on the front surface of the outer main body 100 in a horizontally-opening door shape with a rotating shaft 100a. A door-shaped front member 200, a symbol variation display device 300 for varying a plurality of symbols by a driving unit, a case member 400 detachable from the outer body 100 and having an opening 401 on the front, and an arbitrary image. And an image display 500 for display.

[Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the outer main body 100 has side plates 102, 102 attached to the left and right sides of the bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 installed at the top of the side plates 102, 102, and has a vertically long “mouth” in front view. The frame is shaped like a letter, and a back plate 104 is fixed to the back of the frame to form a box having only a front opening. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the front edges are slightly inclined in a rearwardly inclined state, so that the opening of the outer body 100 has a rearwardly inclined state. In addition, the top board 103 has a plurality of (in the embodiment, in an area facing) the upper cross 600 (see the imaginary line in FIG. 25) of the gaming machine installation island when installed on the gaming machine installation island (not shown). 4) are formed.

[Outer body-partition plate]
Inside the outer body 100, a shelf-shaped partition plate 105 is provided substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in a front view having a projecting step 106 at the center as shown in FIGS. Are fixed to the inner surfaces of the side plates 102, 102, and a vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixed to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 for mounting. The mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 has a cylindrical projection (not shown) formed by burring (metal processing for raising a short cylindrical projection while expanding the diameter of the pilot hole with a punch). The cylindrical projection is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 to be positioned. An opening 109 for wiring is formed between the partition plate 105 and the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 at the innermost portion on both sides.

[Outer body-partition-lower space]
In a space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, a medal discharging device 110 that discharges a medal, which is a game medium, to a medal tray 201 at a lower front portion of the door-shaped front member 200, and a medal discharging device 110 A medal auxiliary storage box 111 for storing overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[Outer body-partition-lower space-medal ejection device]
The medal discharge device 110 has a medal storage hopper 110b attached to an apparatus main body 110a having a built-in driving means. A medal discharge port 110c is provided on a front surface of the apparatus main body 110a. Certain medals are sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. Further, the hopper 110b is provided with an overflow gutter 110d for discharging overflowed medals, and the above-mentioned medal auxiliary storage box 111 faces below the tip of the overflow gutter 110d. The medal discharge mechanism of the medal discharge device 110 may employ any of the currently known mechanisms, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[Outer body-partition-lower space-power supply]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 30, the power supply device 112 has three members, that is, a bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100, a side plate 102 on the left side as viewed from the front, and a back plate 104, which are attached to inner corners where they are orthogonal to each other. I have. The power supply device 112 is a component for supplying electricity to the electric components such as the medal discharge device 110 and the like, and is a component that easily generates heat. The mouth 104a is opened.

  The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, so that it is easy to find unauthorized manipulation of the substrate 112s (see FIG. 30) of the power supply device 112 and the like. The device case 112a includes an upper surface plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer body 100, a front plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear plate 112c, and the inside of the slot machine 1. It is formed of a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r that covers the bottom (see FIG. 30). On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a on the side facing the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is not covered and is in an open state, but this open surface is attached to the outer body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer body 100. Will be blocked.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a step-like guard portion 102b, and under the guard portion 102b, the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a. It is designed to sneak in one side. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the seam between the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is closed by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 31 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is formed in a groove shape. In this example, the edge of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is slightly protruded toward the side plate 102, and the tip of the guard plate 102b is It is designed to fit into the groove.

  As described above, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer body 100 that is in contact with the side plate 102 has an open structure without a cover and is closed by the side plate 102 during use, the device case 112a The substrate 112s and the like can be easily assembled using the open surface, and workability is improved because it is not necessary to cover the open surface after the substrate 112s and the like are assembled in the device case 112a.

  The top plate 112b, the side plate 112e, the slope plate 112f, the rear plate 112c, the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a are provided with a large number of ventilation holes 112g, 112g, etc. so that heat is not stored inside. . The device case 112a is raised on a raised floor by legs 112h, 112h,... Provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-rise relatively cool air can be introduced into the apparatus case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g,... Of the bottom plate 112r. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiation port 104a of the outer main body 100, cool air behind the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. It should be noted that if an inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 30) for raising the ventilation space 112i is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a, the height of the leg 112h and the heat radiation port 104a can be increased. The ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiating port 104a even if the height is misaligned.

[Outer body-partition-lower space-power supply-fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes a mounting piece 112k perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion protruding from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The outer body 100 is fixed to the outer body 100 by a combination of 112 m and a heat radiating opening 104 a formed in the back plate 104 of the outer body 100.

  That is, the outline of the heat radiation port 104a is formed smaller than the outline of the rear face plate 112c of the device case 112a. Therefore, the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiation hole 104a. A projection 112m projecting from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is located at a position inscribed in the heat radiation port 104a, and a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the heat radiation port 104a in order to resist the floating operation of the power supply device 112. It comprises a piece 112m-1 and a vertical protruding piece 112m-2 inscribed in the longitudinal side of the heat radiating port 104a in order to resist the rollover operation of the power supply device 112. Therefore, simply pushing the power supply device 112 along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 and inserting the protrusion 112m into the heat radiation port 104a will raise the rear surface (rear side) of the device case 112a upward (upward) as shown in FIG. The fixing in the right direction (rollover) is completed. Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is regulated by the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 in the leftward direction in FIG. With a simple operation of merely fitting the protrusion 112m, the movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted except for the direction in which the power supply device 112 is pulled toward the user.

  On the other hand, a plurality of through holes 112p for screws are formed in the mounting piece 112k protruding from the front plate 112d, and at least one of the through holes 112p is fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 through a wood screw 112q. Accordingly, the movement of the power supply device 112 is also restricted in the direction in which the power supply device 112 is pulled forward, so that the power supply device 112 can be securely fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[Outer body-partition-lower space-power supply-power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving power supply from outside is connected to the power supply 112. Conventionally, a bulging portion is provided beside the heat radiating port 104a, and the power cord is pulled out from the bulging portion. However, in this position, there is a high risk that the power cord may be slid on the ground even if the power cords are bundled. The slot machine 1 may be turned on during the manufacturing process, and the power cord must be put out of the outer body 100 in preparation for such a case. During the movement of the slot machine, there is a risk that the power cord may slide on the ground or get under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1 and be pinched.

  On the other hand, in the heat radiating port 104a of the embodiment, the cord outlet 104b is extended upward from the upper side, and the power cord is pulled out therefrom. This ensures a sufficient height to hang the bundled power cords in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of erroneously damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1, since the mounting is completed only by setting the power supply device 112 at the inner corner portion of the outer main body 100 and screwing the single wood screw 112q, the mounting operation of the power supply device 112 can be completed as compared with the related art. Significant labor savings are possible. Further, in the slot machine 1, since the fixing is completed by screwing it to one surface, it is easy to visually recognize, especially when the part to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112, and the fixing is securely performed. it can. By the way, conventionally, it is necessary to screw the plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112 with screws, and in particular, the screws fixed to the back plate 104 are difficult to visually recognize, and thus may be forgotten.

  Further, since the heat radiating port 104a is required as a cooling means of the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiating port 104a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, extra steps and costs are hardly generated. On the contrary, since the position of the heat radiating port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are matched for fixing, the cooling efficiency is improved. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the mounting protrusion 112m can be integrally formed, so that almost no cost is required. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the related art.

  Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin, there is a merit that the leg portion 112h and the step portion 112j of the device case 112a, which are useful as a measure against heat generation of the power supply device 112, can be implemented with little cost.

[Outer body-partition-upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is accommodated in a space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and a wiring relay member 113 serving as a core of wiring means to be described later is provided on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. It is attached (see FIGS. 1 and 2), and a vent 133 for heat radiation is formed in the back plate 104 above the wiring relay member 113.

[Door type front member]
FIG. 3 shows the front side of the door-shaped front member 200, and FIG. 1 shows the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 below the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided substantially at the center of the front side. The operation unit 202 has an insertion slot 203 for inserting medals and an insertion (pull-in) of only one of medals (so-called credit data) stored as data in a memory of a main board 409 described later, for example, with an upper limit of 50 medals. ), A first MAX insertion button 206 for instructing the same maximum number (for example, three) that can be used in one game, and a medal selector 207 described later. A medal return button 208 for returning the medal to the medal tray 201; a storage release switch 209 for inputting a medal storage release command (release command by settlement) stored as data in the memory of the main board 409; , A start lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300, and each reel 3 of the symbol variation display device 300 1a, 301b, 3 reels stop button 211a to stop the 301c, 211b, 211c and the like. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is one example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Note that the starting lever 210 corresponds to a starting operation section described in the solution means. The three reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c correspond to a plurality of stop operation units described in the solving means.

  A medal selector 207 is provided behind the slot 203, and a medal gutter 212 is connected beside the medal selector 207, and a return gutter 213 is connected below. The medal selector 207 is a known type that switches a flow path by turning on / off a built-in solenoid (not shown). In a game state where the player waits for a medal to be inserted, the flow path is shifted to the medal gutter 212 side. Also, in a gaming state in which the insertion of medals is rejected, such as the insertion of medals exceeding a specified number, the flow path is set to the return gutter 213 side. When the door-shaped front member 200 is in the closed position over the front surface of the outer body 100, the tip of the medal gutter 212 faces the hopper 110 b of the medal discharge device 110. The medals flowing to the medal gutter 212 through the hopper reach the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return gutter 213 is connected to the medal tray 201 on the front side, and the medals flowing to the return gutter 213 from the slot 203 through the medal selector 207 return to the medal tray 201.

[Door type front member-see-through window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is large enough to cover the entire front surface of the outer body 100, and the upper half thereof is a transparent window for games covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. 214. The see-through window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 can be seen side by side vertically, and the image is formed by the forehead frame 216 integrated with the door-shaped front member 200. The areas of the display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 are visually divided vertically. If the size of one transparent plate 214a is set to cover both the image display body 500 and the design variation display device 300, the arrangement of the image display body 500 and the design variation display device 300 is switched. However, it can be used as it is.

[Door type front member-see-through window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a rubber-containing methacrylic resin having excellent impact resistance, abrasion resistance, and optical characteristics; in the embodiment, “Acrypet (registered trademark) IR D30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.). ) Is an upside-down form in which a trapezoid is substantially inverted, and edge members 214b bulging to the front side with the side facing the player as the front side around three sides (left side and top side) excluding the bottom side. 214b, 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a resin molding frame. When the edge member 214b is formed integrally with the periphery of the flat plate-shaped transparent plate 214a as described above, the edge member 214b becomes a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. As described above, even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, bending and distortion are unlikely to occur.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the edge member 214b has a shell structure that opens to the rear side (not a solid but a shell-like structure having a space inside, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, if necessary, a decorative member (not shown) having, for example, a pattern or text on its surface are incorporated in the internal space.

  34, the light emitting unit 217 is illustrated as being attached to the door-shaped front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

  The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to the illustrated one, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the periphery of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, and may be provided at least on any one side.

  33 and 34, reference numeral 218 denotes a fixing member provided at the left and right corners on the transparent plate 214a, and a screw passing through the through hole 214c (see the enlarged view of FIG. 33) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown), and is stopped in the state of FIG. 34 fitted between the edge members 214b. The fixing member 218 serves as a corner decoration in appearance, while the fixing member 218 has a through hole 200a, 214d (see an enlarged view in FIG. 33) provided in a corner portion above each of the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door-shaped front member 200, thereby serving as a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214 a to the door-shaped front member 200.

  33 to 35, reference numeral 217a denotes a light emitting body of the light emitting unit 217, and reference numeral 217b denotes a reflecting member that supports the light emitting body 217a. The reflection members 217b of the light emitting units 217 located on the left and right are set at an angle such that the light of the rod-shaped light emitter 217a is largely reflected toward the periphery of the slot machine 1 as shown in FIG. In the embodiment in which the light-emitting unit 217 is incorporated into the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light-emitting body 217a can be arranged on the front side of the slot machine 1, so that the light-emitting body 217a is like a lighthouse at the tip of a cape. This is advantageous when light is emitted toward the surroundings. The reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect the light of the light emitting body 217a (combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) largely upward of the slot machine 1. ing.

  The light-emitting unit 217 having the above configuration can be lit during a game, particularly when a big hit occurs, and can perform an effect of appealing the occurrence of the big hit to the surroundings. By performing an effect with a high degree of appeal to the surroundings in this way, the player who has won the jackpot can be noticed, and the eyes of many people can give the player a sense of superiority. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will be increased and the operating rate will be improved by appealing to the surroundings that the jackpot has been generated.

  The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and has a plate-like bottom side of the door-shaped front member 200 with respect to the concave groove 219 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 34) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. It is inserted obliquely from the front and fitted in a fitting manner. In this state, the transparent plate 214a is erected, and all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b are brought into contact with the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200. It is fixed with a screw 603 (see FIG. 1) passed from the back. FIG. 35 is a cutaway view of the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time. As is apparent from FIG. 35, if the player temporarily removes foreign matter from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. , There is little room for the tip of the foreign matter to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, an excellent security effect is exhibited.

[Door type front member-lock device]
On one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200, a lock device 215 that is opened and closed using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided.

[Symbol variation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, and incorporates and accommodates, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, 301c that can be individually rotated by driving means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. And a device case 302 for playing a game with a combination of a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surface of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c.

  The device case 302 is a modified hexagonal prism form in which three sides toward the front (a player) are removed from an octagonal prism that is laid down, and has a bottom plate 304, a top plate 305, and a right side in FIG. , A left side plate 307 on the left side, a vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, an upper swash plate 309 provided between the top plate portion 305 and the rear plate 308, a bottom plate 304, and a rear plate 308. It has a box shape surrounded by a lower swash plate 310 provided between the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, and a part of the arc of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c protrudes from the front of the apparatus case 302.

  The top plate 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 that can be switched between a use state in which a finger can be hooked and an unused state in which the top plate 305 is laid down. To carry.

  The configuration in which the handle 311 that can be changed as described above is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the apparatus case 302 is closely related to a measure for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as described later, the reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400, and thus the opening 401 of the case member 400 has sufficient strength to allow the image display body 500 to be cantilevered. However, since such a reinforcing bar 402 crosses the opening 401, it clearly becomes a hindrance to putting the device case 302 into and out of the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 is made to be changeable and laid down on the top plate 305 as in the embodiment, since the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, the device case 302 can pass under the reinforcing bar 402 without difficulty. Therefore, only by providing the handle 311 that can be changed as described above on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in a direction crossing the opening 401 at the opening 401 of the case member 400. Become. By the way, in the conventional device case, since the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle, there is no room for providing a reinforcing bar at the opening of the case member.

  Although the handle 311 of the embodiment is configured to swing and change between a standing use state and a prone non-use state, a structure capable of changing the handle 311 between a use state and a non-use state is described in the following. It is not limited to the form. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, two belt loops 314 and 314 are cut and raised in the top plate section 305, and the belt loops 314 and 314 are made of, for example, synthetic resin or leather and have retaining portions 315 and 315 at both ends. The use state in which a finger can be hooked, such as a structure in which the band-shaped handle 311 provided is inserted and the center is pulled up from the folded unused state in FIG. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to a non-use state in which it is flat.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, a flange-shaped lower handle 316 is protruded from the bottom plate 304 of the apparatus case 302 of the embodiment, and the lower case 316 is grasped and the apparatus case 302 is pushed or pushed. By pulling, it is easy to put in and out of the case member 400.

[Case member]
The case member 400 has a size substantially matching the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404, 404 erected on both left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. A rear plate 405 is provided upright on the rear edge, and a top plate 406 that covers the upper surfaces of the rear plate 405 and the side plates 404, 404, and has a box shape having an opening 401 on the front surface.

  In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin. Members 407, 407, 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402, which crosses the opening 401, extends between the reinforcing members 407, 407 of the side plates 404, 404. The area below the reinforcing bar 402 is set as the installation area of the symbol variation display device 300, and the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 is set as the installation area of the image display body 500. An area surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is allocated as a wiring work space 408, and a main board 409, which is a main control board, is mounted on an inner wall surface of a rear plate 405 of the wiring work space 408. A control board and the like other than the main board 409 (for example, effect control board 510 (see FIG. 44)) are also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

  On the top plate 406 of the case member 400, skylight portions 443 and 443 are formed as shown in FIG. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two portions with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the ceiling plate 406 therebetween, and each of the portions is connected to an axis passing through the through-holes 132 of the outer main body 100. It is located in a region including the intersection, and is sufficiently wider than the through holes 132. However, the front edge of the skylight 443 is moved closer to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, the through-hole 132 can be found by groping with reference to the periphery of the skylight 443, so that even if the operator cannot look inside the skylight 443, the position of the through-hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined. Here, the skylight 443 also functions as an opening of the slot machine 1. That is, by providing a plurality of skylights 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, the weight can be reduced, and the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement can be further reduced.

  A plurality of bosses 410, 410 are protruded from the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 2, FIG. 5, FIG. 6, and FIG. The boss holes 114, 114 pre-processed into the holes 104 are fitted and positioned. The bosses 410, 410 are provided near a wiring window 411, which will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 5, while the boss holes 114, 114 on the outer body 100 side are near the wiring relay member 113. The positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

  On the other hand, a concave step 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 2, and the concave step 412 fits into the projecting step 106 of the partition plate 105. A tapered portion 413 extending in the rearward direction is provided at the end of the concave step portion 412 on the rear face plate 405 side, and the projecting step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400 are guided by the tapered portion 413. The fitting with the concave step part 412 can be performed smoothly. As described above, the case member 400 is guided straight into the interior of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the concave step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the projecting step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A groove member-shaped rail member 115 is laid or integrally formed on the plate 105, while a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the wheel 414 is rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. Is also good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 21, a convex rail member 116 is laid on the partition plate 105 or integrally formed by press molding, while flanges 415 and 415 are formed at both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400. The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the flanges 415 and 415 of the wheel 414.

  The case member 400 is stopped by a swing lever type stopper 117 shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 18, and 23 in a state where the case member 400 is set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. The stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end of the partition plate 105 and two mounting members 118, 118 which are suspended from the top plate 103 as shown in FIGS. In the forward direction on the partition plate 105 of the case member 400, the operating position in which the case member 400 is engaged with a part of the case member 400 and the non-operating position in which the case member 400 is not engaged as shown in FIG. Regulate movement. When the stopper 117 is formed in a key shape as shown in FIG. 19 and is engaged with the hook 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

  The stopper 117 pivotally attached to the mounting member 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing a locking hole 442 penetrating through a corner of the side plate 404 and the top plate 406 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. When the case member 400 is pushed into a predetermined position, the operating posture and the non-operating posture can be switched from inside the case member 400.

  In addition, a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole penetrating through the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 is provided. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 installed on the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. And the horizontal empty space 417 above the upper swash plate 309 (or may be thought of as a horizontally long triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main substrate 409). It functions as an opening connecting the plates 104.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf-shaped temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as a “temporary fixing shelf”) at a substantially intermediate position of the height of the empty space 417. Further, recesses 419, 419 are formed outside the rear plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411, as wiring passages that pass through the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400.

  If the layout of the wiring window 411 is specified with reference to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, the wiring window 411 will be arranged as shown in FIG. The state where the range between the horizontal plane HL passing through the center of rotation of the reels 301b and 301c and the horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b and 301c is the lower limit, that is, the lower side is disposed within the range. In other words, it can be said that it is.

[Image display]
The image display body 500 is, for example, a panel-type unit capable of displaying an image, which is constituted by at least a liquid crystal display (otherwise, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like). It also functions as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 44) that closes at the same time. Note that the image display body 500 has a hinge member 420 attached to a reinforcing member 407 provided on the left side plate 404 of the case member 400 in FIG. 11 (see the hatched portion in FIG. 11 for the attachment position), and is rotated by the hinge member 420. It is freely supported.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 44, effect control boards 510 and 520 are mounted on the back side of the image display body 500. Therefore, it is possible to integrally form the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the effect control boards 510 and 520, and it is easy to handle, and wiring for connecting the two can be omitted. Of the wiring work space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the effect control boards 510 and 520 appear so as to protrude from the inside of the case member 400, so that workability with respect to the effect control boards 510 and 520 can be significantly improved.

[Image display body-hinge fitting]
FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. Since the hinge fitting 420 has a vertically symmetrical structure, the upper part will mainly be described. The hinge fitting 420 includes a fixing member 420a to be attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, a rotating member 420b to be attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see a broken line area 500s in FIG. 36), and a fixing to the rotating member 420b. It is composed of a short link 420c and a long link 420d connecting the members 420a.

  The fixing member 420a of the hinge fitting 420 has a horizontal fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate, one end of a long link 420d is provided on the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e with a pin P1, and a short link is provided on the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is rotatably mounted on a pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge fitting 420 has a lateral bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf, and one end of a long link 420d is provided on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f with a pin P3, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f is provided. One end of the short link 420c is rotatably mounted on a pin P4.

  Thus, the fixing piece 420e, the shaft bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 form a four-bar rotating chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. 37. A so-called double lever mechanism is configured in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain shaft bearing piece 420f is used as a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c), the two lever mechanisms approximate the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory of the door-shaped front member 200 about the rotation axis 100a. For this purpose, the respective pin positions are set. In other words, the hinge fitting 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the rotation position of the door-shaped front member 200 changes, the rotation outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the outside of the rotation of the image display body 500 are changed. The distance from the rim is made substantially constant.

  The long link 420d and the short link 420c have overlapping regions 420g and 420h set so as to overlap vertically with the image display body 500 rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the overlapping of the long link 420d). The region 420g is bulged in a triangular shape so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c), and pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j are aligned on the same axis to connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c by inserting a rod-shaped stopper pin (not shown), thereby locking both lever mechanisms and displaying the image display body. It is for fixing 500 in the open position.

[Image Display-Lock Piece]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, a lock is provided on the reinforcing member 407 (the right side in FIG. 11) of the vertical reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400 opposite to the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420. When the lock piece 421 is pivoted clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 11, the tip of the lock piece 421 engages with the receiving portion 508 protruding from the rear side of the image display body 500. The image display 500 is locked at a position where the upper part of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is turned in the opposite direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the image display body 500 can be turned around the hinge fitting 420. Normally, before the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while, when the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100, the image is not displayed. The lock of the display body 500 is released so that the display body 500 can be freely rotated.

[Image Display-Connecting Tool]
By the way, the case member 400 is provided with the image display body 500 that can be opened and closed separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, so that the case member 400 can be visually recognized or worked inside the case member 400. In this case, first, it is necessary to open the front door member 200 on the front side and then further open the image display body 500 on the back side, which may cause a reduction in workability or inconvenience. .

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to the same direction as the rotation direction of the door-shaped front member 200, and the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. The image display body 500 is opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 also rotates in the same direction via the connecting member 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. In other words, the image display body 500 rotates along with the door-shaped front member 200, and it becomes possible to visually recognize not only the inside of the outer body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 by one horizontal opening operation.

  As described above, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 of the embodiment are connected to each other by the levers of the hinge fitting 420 so that the rotation locus of the image display body 500 is changed by the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200. Is approximated to a rotation trajectory having a rotation center as a rotation center, but there is still a relative shift between the movements of the two. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the connecting tool 700 of the embodiment forms the fixed sheath member 701 on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500, and slides inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is put in a free state, and the tip of the rod 702 is connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the lock device 215) by a stop shaft 703 so as to be rotatable. is there. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 39, the image display body 500 opens and closes together as if it were an accessory to the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. The rod 702 of the connecting member 700 moves in and out of the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative displacement of the movement.

  Note that the maximum protruding length when the rod 702 protrudes most from the outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 when the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, when the image display body 500 is opened by 90 °). The distance is set based on the distance between the rotation outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (the position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotation outer edge of the image display body 500. For this reason, the length of the rod 702 can be reduced to a necessary minimum length, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the size of the coupling tool.

  The stop shaft 703 is vertically movably mounted on support pieces 215b, 215b, 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215, and is constantly urged downward by a spring 703a. Have been. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved upward against the bias of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connecting member 700 can be attached and detached by moving the stop shaft 703 upward to float the lower end. That is, the stop shaft 703 is inserted from above into the shaft hole 702a formed at the distal end of the rod 702, and can be held by the urging force of the spring 703a.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connecting tool 700, and the rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is fixed to the fixed sheath member 701. It is intended to be housed and held inside, and engages with a catching wall 702b at the end of a groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent blind movement of the rod 702. The rod 702 is provided with a knob 706 protruding from a side surface thereof in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction. The lock of the stopper 704 is released by gripping the knob 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It has become. Further, on the bottom surface on the distal end side of the fixed sheath member 701, a retaining prevention piece 701a is hung down and inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The stopper preventing piece 701a comes into contact with the hooking wall 702b when the rod 702 projects most, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 509 near the coupler 700 denotes an engagement portion protruding from the back surface of the image display body 500 on the outer edge side of the rotation. The engaging portion 509 is engaged with the reinforcing bar 402 crossing the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 at the closed position. As shown in FIG. 11, the reinforcing bar 402 is provided with a slide-type guide portion 402 a that is inclined downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably (exchangeably) attached to the image display body 500. I have.

  By the way, the relative displacement of the movement due to the difference in the rotation locus of the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 can be reduced by using a flexible wire in addition to the above-described telescopic rod-type connecting tool 700. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connecting member is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will hit the image display body 500 that is stopped with the door-shaped front member 200 open at the stage of closing the door-shaped front member 200, and the smoothness will be impaired. There is a risk. On the other hand, for example, an urging means such as a winding spring may be provided on the image display body 500 so as to always urge in the closing direction. By doing so, at the time of the closing operation of the door-shaped front member 200, the image display body 500 closes by itself while pulling the coupling tool by the action of the urging force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 does not collide with the image display body 500. Of course, the means for rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge fitting 420, which is one element for swiveling in the above, is not limited to the structure of the double lever mechanism as described above, and is centered on a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. It may be a simple one that rotates the image display body 500.

  The image display body 500 is attached to the case member 400 with a hinge structure so that the image display body 500 can be turned in a door shape. When the above-mentioned lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 attached to the outer body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, for example, for checking the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select the handling. In this case, the image display body 500 can block important components (for example, the main board 409 and the effect control boards 510 and 520) in the wiring work space 408, so that the security performance is improved. effective.

  A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is moved by a finger passing through the gap 10. You can grab it. A handle 422 is formed in the front center portion of the top plate 406 of the case member 400 (the reinforcing band 444 between the skylights 443 and 443), and a finger passed through the handle opening 422 is used to hold the top plate 406. The reinforcing member 407 can be grasped. Therefore, the case member 400 can appropriately use the handle port 422 and the gap 10 appropriately depending on the place and posture of the case member 400 to be handled. For example, when the case member 400 is transported before being incorporated into the outer main body 100, it is better to carry the case member 400 in a bag form using the grip opening 422. As described above, since the handle opening 422 is hidden behind the outer body 100 and does not allow a finger to enter, the finger is hooked on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10 and the case member 400 is pulled out. The lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 4 and 11) of the device case 302 protrudes from the center of the front surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. The lower handle 316 is pushed or pulled to hold the outer body 100. The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out of the case. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integral with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with screws, and thus the lower handle 316 is provided to project from the front surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Is equal to

[Image Display-Frame Member]
The image display body 500 is large enough to cover almost the entire area above the reinforcing bar 402 in the opening 401 of the case member 400. Further, a frame member 501 surrounding the area below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, the front area of the symbol variation display device 300 in a frame-like manner is provided below the image display body 500. The reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol change display device 300 are framed by the frame member 501. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, and an appropriate pattern or the like is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 includes a light source such as an LED, a light emission control board for controlling the light source, and a decorative member disposed in front of the light source and capable of transmitting light. Part is provided. Here, a combination of the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 is referred to as a front opening / closing member 90 hereinafter.
(See FIG. 44).

[Image display body-Frame member-Lighting device]
Illumination devices 502 are provided on the upper and lower sides of the frame member 501, and the illumination device 502 illuminates the symbol of the symbol variation display device 300 brightly. Since the frame member 501 is vertically provided below the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variation display device 300, the light source can be brought closer to the symbol variation display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 into such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the lighting device 502 into the frame member 501 is characterized in that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low light amount as compared with the conventional lighting device.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a lighting device 502 exemplified as an embodiment has a strip-shaped substrate that is elongated in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing (the width direction of the slot machine 1 and the same direction as the rotation axis of the reels 301a...). A large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged in a column 503. The lower lighting device 502 includes the LEDs 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is closed by, for example, a milky white translucent cover plate 505. On the other hand, the upper lighting device 502 is configured such that the LEDs 504 face down in a translucent cover 507 that is, for example, milky white and has a U-shaped cross section.

  The upper lighting device 502 is installed with the lighting direction obliquely downward from directly below to the player side, that is, toward the transparent plate 214a side, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is set so that the center line L (refer to the enlarged view of FIG. 4) of the main irradiation area of the LED 504 having relatively strong directivity is directed obliquely to the transparent plate 214 a. It is inclined obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

  Also, if a rod-shaped light-emitting body such as a fluorescent lamp is employed as the light source of the lighting device 502, the substrate 503 in FIG. 4 is changed to a plate-shaped or concave-shaped reflecting member that wraps the light source, and direct light and What is necessary is just to set so that the center line of the main irradiation area directed by the sum of the reflected light may obliquely hit the back surface on the transparent plate 214a side. As described above, if the irradiation target of the illumination device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a, even if some of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, there is almost no effect.

  According to an experiment, when the illumination direction of the illumination device 502 is directed toward the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, specific portions of the curved reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are strongly reflected and become hard to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is obliquely directed to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is illuminated via the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are not illuminated. It was confirmed that a wide area became bright and easy to see. The reason is that the light emitted from the lighting device 502 is reflected on the transparent plate 214a fitted to the see-through window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and is reflected and diffused throughout, or the reel 301a is illuminated brightly by the transparent plate 214a. It is presumed that a wide range of 301b and 301c looks bright or is due to their synergistic action.

  The structure of the upper lighting device 502 as described above can be adopted also for the lower lighting device 502, and can be adopted only for the lower lighting device 502 as shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 32 shows the upper lighting device 502 in FIG. 4 arranged on the lower side and the lower lighting device 502 arranged on the upper side. And “bottom” to “top”.

  By the way, when the LED is adopted as the light source of the illumination device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) the safety is higher than that of the conventional cold-cathode tube driven at a high voltage of about 200 V because it is driven at a low voltage. ) Longer life than cold-cathode tubes, (c) more durable than glass-cathode cold-cathode tubes, (d) multicolor light emission is possible to extend the range of effects, (e) combined with inverter This is advantageous in that it is lighter than a cold-cathode tube used and that the burden on the hinge 420 supporting the image display body 500 is small.

[Wiring means]
For example, each of the input buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 (hereinafter, collectively referred to simply as “medal discharge device 110, power supply device 112, and operation unit 202 of the door-shaped front member 200” attached to the outer main body 100, for example. For example, the main board 409 and the like in the case member 400 (in some cases, the case member-side electric components are simply referred to as “case member-side electric components”) are electricity. Connected. In the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment, the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 44 and 45) including the front opening / closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable from the outer main body 100. At this time, a reasonable wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the main body side electric component (the housing side electric component) and the case member side electric component.

[Wiring means-Wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 14 is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. I have. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body-side wirings 119 connected to the main body-side electric components and the case-side wirings 423 connected to the case member-side electric components, and is provided on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 to be screwed, a cover body 121 that covers the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (two in the embodiment, large and small) connector boards (hereinafter, referred to as “two” in the embodiment) accommodated between the cover body 121 and the mounting plate 120. "The connector connection terminal board" may be used.) 122, 123.

  Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120, and is connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 that is paired with the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 is provided.

  On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is attached to the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121 in a non-fixed and freely movable state, and therefore, is an enlarged view of FIG. As shown in (1), it can move up and down, and can also move left and right. The small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that is paired with a connector 427 at the tip of a harness 426 that is connected to a case member-side electrical component other than the main board 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are of a board fixed type which is fixed to a printed board by a fixing means such as soldering, and are inexpensive according to the DIN standard.

  The cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 protruding at a position side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half. And a tunnel-shaped wiring duct 129 projecting forward from the front.

The main body side wirings 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 pass through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or are bundled in a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 protruding from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. 1 is distributed to the side plates 102, 102 side of the outer main body 100 as shown by the dashed line L in FIG. 1, and the direction is changed almost vertically near the corners of the side plates 102, 102 and the back plate 104, and most of them are Through the wiring openings 109 provided in the back of the partition plate 105, they are respectively connected to the main body side electric components. Of course, if there is a main body side electric component (for example, an external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in a region above the partition plate 105, regardless of the wiring opening 109 of the partition plate 105. Connected as is.

From the wiring means described so far, the following technical ideas can be grasped.
(A) The rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is positioned between a horizontal plane passing through the rotation centers of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 and a horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. The wiring window 411 is formed at a height where the lower side is located.
(B) On the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, a wiring relay member 113 for relaying the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric components and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric components is installed.
(C) A vertical wiring path for passing wiring is formed along the inner surfaces of the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100.
(D) The main body side wirings 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 are guided to the side of the case member 400, and are connected therefrom to the main body side electric components through the wiring path.

  In the gaming machine provided with the above components (a) to (d), the main body side wirings 119 do not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100 are not passed. The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be brought close to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 to bypass the wiring route provided along the side (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 10)). The diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is smaller than that of the conventional configuration, that is, the conventional configuration in which the main body side wirings 119 pass substantially behind the center of the back plate 104 and pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. Can be bigger. The larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the greater the force at the time of rotation.

[Wiring means-connectors 425, 427]
The two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 as described above include the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main board 409. The connectors 427 at the ends of the harnesses 426 connected to the electric components are respectively connected.

  These two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-shaped attachment piece 431 having a through hole 430 substantially at the center and protruding from both sides of the holder main body 429, A well-known button-shaped panel fastener 432 (trade name “Nylatch”: registered trademark) attached to the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. The attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support cylinder 128, and the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Therefore, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 as the fixing means, and further to the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 are not disconnected.

[Wiring relay board-connector-temporary fixing shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113. However, before the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer main body 100, that is, during the period from the factory shipment to the completion of installation, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected. 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400.

  The temporary holding shelf 418 is a shelf-like member that faces the wiring window 411 from the inside of the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 12, and 13, and is shown in FIG. 433 on which the connector holder 428 is placed, a bench side plate 434 erected on both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inwardly-facing claws 435, 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , 435. A space is provided between the center one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, and 435 and the other upper and lower two pieces so that the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted. The one bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hook 436 is extended at the tip, and is supported at one end by applying a finger to the finger hook 436 and applying a force in the X direction shown in FIG. The attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, and 435 in such a state that the attachment piece 431 is easily disengaged like a leaf spring. The imaginary line in FIG. 8A shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook 436 is bent in a key shape, whereby the removal of the connector holder 428 can be performed as if pressing a button as indicated by an arrow Y. Easy to do.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary holding shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw pieces 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434. The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 by being fitted between 435. Of course, even if it says temporary fixing, the connector holder 428 is set to have a strength that does not come off from the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400. Therefore, until the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer main body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the operation of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the ends of the harnesses 424 and 426 hit the components inside the case member 400, and the components are of course There is no risk of damage to itself.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8 (b) → FIG. 8 (a), in the wiring process after fixing the case member 400 to the outer main body 100, one of the bench side plates 434 is warped outward as described above. When the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary holding shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where its own attachment piece 431 contacts the support cylinder 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connector of the wiring relay member 113. The fitting pieces 431 are locked into the support cylinder 128 by pushing the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attaching piece 431 in that state. At this time, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIGS. 5 and 6, if guide rails 440 for guiding are provided on the bench portion 433, it is only necessary to push the connector holder 428 to the back. improves.

  The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable using the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a support base, is separated from the case member, and does not come in contact with the case member. Even if the 100 and the model unit 50 move relatively, no excessive load is applied.

From the description so far, the following technical ideas can be grasped.
(A) an outer main body having a box shape having an open front surface and a back surface covered with a back plate, and having a power supply device and other main body-side electric components;
(B) a model unit provided with a symbol change display device for changing a plurality of symbols on a case member detachable from the outer main body and other case member-side electric components;
(C) a wiring relay member attached to a back plate of the outer main body to relay wiring on the main body side connected to the electric component on the main body side and wiring on the case side connected to the electric component on the case member side;
(D) a connector attached to the tip of the case-side wiring,
(E) a connector holder attached to the connector;
(F) a temporary fixing member provided on the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder;
(G) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member,
(H) temporarily fixing the connector holder to the temporary fixing member before the model unit is mounted on the outer main body, and replacing the connector holder from the temporary fixing member to the fixing means with the model unit mounted on the outer main body; (I) A gaming machine wherein a connector of a connector holder is connected to a wiring relay member.

  In the gaming machine described above, the attachment of the model unit 50 to the outer body 100 and the connection of the connectors are performed separately. In contrast, for example, the connector is directly attached to the model unit 50. A method of automatically connecting the connectors by pushing the model unit 50 into the outer main body 100 is conceivable. However, this method has a problem that when the model unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer body 100 during transportation or the like, a large load is applied to the connector coupling portion, and there is a concern about reliability. is there.

  The slot machine 1 has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. Specifically, a gaming machine in which the door-shaped front member is divided into two upper and lower stages and the upper door-shaped front member is a component on the model unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, so that the coupling of the connector may be unstable. There is a problem that a new security structure is required for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. After the connector 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is connected to a component (the wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer body 100 as shown in FIG. Therefore, even when a low-cost general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board is used, there is no concern about the reliability and durability during transportation and during a game. Further, only the model unit 50 is to be replaced when the model is changed, and the door-shaped front member 200 is not to be replaced. Therefore, the burden on the game hall for changing the model is reduced.

[Connection between connectors 425 and 427 and connectors 124 and 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are mounted on one connector holder 428. In this way, the connection between the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 to a predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical problem, the structure in which the independent components of the two connectors 425, 427 and the connector holder 428 are gathered and integrated into one unit is a difficult problem of “accurate positioning” of the connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four components of the two connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not all accurate, the connectors 425, 124 and the connectors 427, 125 cannot be collectively connected. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at the cost of a mass-produced product. As one means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector provided with a mechanism for increasing flexibility at the time of joining without soldering to a printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

  On the other hand, according to the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 serving as a board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are respectively mounted thereon, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. A direction perpendicular to the coupling direction between the connector 427 and the connector 125 by being non-fixedly accommodated in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121 (the “perpendicular” here is not limited to strict 90 degrees). Means about 90 degrees according to the conventional wisdom). In this configuration, when the connection aim of the connector holder 428 is set to the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position between the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 moves and the deviation is reduced. The connector 427 and the connector 125 can be connected because they are moved to perform the correction. Thus, a low-priced DIN standard connector that is fixed to the substrate can sufficiently cope with the problem.

From the description so far, the following technical ideas can be grasped.
(1) "In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with the respective connectors, one connector group is fixed to one connector holder and paired with these. Is mounted on the connector board, the connector board is further divided for each connector, and one of the connector groups is fixed to the board supporting member, and the other connector board is connected to the board supporting member in the direction in which the connector is connected to the board supporting member. A gaming machine characterized by being mounted so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to the game machine. "
(2) A plurality of symbols are formed on an outer body having a power supply unit and other main body-side electrical components, and a case member detachable with respect to the outer body. In order to relay a model unit provided with a design variation display device to be varied and other case member-side electric components, main body-side wiring connected to the main body-side electric components, and case-side wiring connected to the case member-side electric components. A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body, two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case-side wiring, a connector holder for collectively supporting the two or more connectors as a connector group, and the connector Fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member, and a board which is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and which is fixed to a printed board for use The connector connection, comprising: another connector group formed by a wearable connector; and a connector connection terminal board attached to the wiring relay member attached to the back plate and having the connector of the other connector group fixed thereto. The terminal board for connection is divided for each connector, one of which is fixed to the wiring relay member, and the other terminal board for connector connection is attached to the wiring relay member so as to be freely movable in the direction orthogonal to the coupling direction of the connector. A gaming machine characterized by doing so. "
(3) "In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each connector, one connector group is fixed to a board supporting member via a connector board. Attach another connector group paired with these to one connector holder, further fix one connector in the connector group to the connector holder, and connect the other connector to the connector holder in the connection direction of the connector with the connector holder. A gaming machine characterized by being mounted so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to the game machine. "
(4) A plurality of symbols are provided on an outer body having a power supply unit and other main body-side electric components, and a case member detachable from the outer body. In order to relay a model unit provided with a design variation display device to be varied and other case member-side electric components, main body-side wiring connected to the main body-side electric components, and case-side wiring connected to the case member-side electric components. A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body, two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case-side wiring, a connector holder for collectively supporting the two or more connectors as a connector group, and the connector Fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member, and a board which is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and which is fixed to a printed board for use The connector holder, comprising: another connector group of a wearable connector; and a connector connection terminal board attached to the wiring relay member attached to the back plate, and fixing the connector of the other connector group. A game machine characterized in that one connector in a connector group is fixed and another connector is mounted on a connector holder so as to be freely movable in a direction perpendicular to the connector coupling direction. "

  If the above gaming machine operates the connector holder while aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation due to a manufacturing error in the relative position of the other connectors, Since the non-fixed connector connection terminal board moves together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation, and absorbs the error, it is also possible to connect the connectors which are not aimed at the connection. Therefore, it is possible to connect a plurality of connectors collectively using one connector holder. Moreover, the connector used is a general-purpose and inexpensive, for example, the DIN standard which is used by soldering to a printed circuit board, and the cost is low.

  In addition, the connector holder is securely fixed to the wiring relay member by the fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark), and further to the back plate of the outer body via the wiring relay member. On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via a flexible harness, and even if the model unit moves, the movement is absorbed by the flexible harness, so the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder. . Therefore, even if relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves together with the outer body alone and does not receive interference from the model unit. No load is applied to the part. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is very high.

  Note that, as in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is made movable and the large connectors 425 and the connectors 124 are defined as the basis of the coupling is different from the reverse configuration in that the connectors 425 and 124 , 427 and 125 can be easily combined. This is because the small connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that the erroneous correction can be easily performed. Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled before the other connectors 427 and 125, so that the connectors for coupling aiming can be easily matched.

  Further, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 9, the chamfered portions C (at the peripheral corners of the tips of the convex connectors 425 and 427 and / or the insertion ports of the concave connectors 124 and 125). If a straight chamfer or a curved chamfer can be formed, the guiding action along the taper of the chamfered portion C makes the connection between the connectors better.

  In addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are movable as in the embodiment, any one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side can be movable. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. FIG. 17 shows a specific example of the connector holder 428. In this example, a receptacle 429a with female threads is projected from the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while ear pieces 427b having play holes 427a on both sides of the connector 427 are formed, and the receptacle 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. The play hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted in the connector 427, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the diameter difference between the play hole 427a and the receiving cylinder 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be integrally fixed to the mounting plate 120. In the embodiment, two connectors are handled as one connector group. However, the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

  In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 12, the recess is formed on the back side of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438, 438 are formed in the vicinity of both ends of the cable groove 437 so as to penetrate the side plate 404 (or the rear plate 405) of the case member 400. The wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 are used to connect the symbol variation display device 300 to the main board 409 and the like. The cable 313 (see FIG. 12) of the reel board 312 provided on the non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 is drawn out of the case member 400 from one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is as shown in FIG. The cable 313 is accommodated in the cable groove 437, and the end of the cable 313 is returned from another wiring port 438 into the case member 400 to be connected to the main board 409 or the like. It should be noted that cable stoppers 439 are provided at predetermined intervals in the cable groove 437 so that the cable 313 does not fall out of the cable groove 437.

  Since the main board 409 and the reel board 312 are both case member-side electric components in the case member 400, there is no need to draw the cable 313 out of the case member 400. The reason why the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 in the case member 400 to detour the cable 313 to the outside is as follows.

  The installation location of the reel board 312 is determined on the non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 among the side surfaces of the symbol variation display device 300 (device case 302) in consideration of the workability of wiring for connecting and disconnecting a connector in a limited space. Is preferable. Conversely, if the reel board 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the opened door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 1) and the reel board 312 will be in close proximity. Because they face each other, it is not possible to secure a wide working space necessary for connecting and disconnecting the connector.

  On the other hand, on the other hand, the connection part of the boards (the main board 409, the effect control boards 510 and 520, the image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel board 312 corresponds to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400. , The cable 313 crosses the inside of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 may be bitten when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or the cable 313 may be hooked when the device case 302 is pulled out.

  On the other hand, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 in the case member 400 so as to bypass the cable 313 to the outside, the trouble of the cable 313 described above does not occur. Further, it is better to carry out the wiring work in a state where the device case 302 is slightly pulled out from a predetermined position, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel board 312 is not limited to the wiring cost. There is room to say. Therefore, the cable 313 is slackened in a state where the apparatus case 302 is set at a predetermined position, and the slack of the cable 313 is increased depending on the amount of pulling out. When such slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 is formed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 and the corner at the back of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. The slack part of can be escaped.

  When the cable groove 437 is expanded toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, the cable groove 437 is expanded between the back of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. Useful for effective use of dead space. Note that the wiring using the wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 does not need to be limited to the cable 313 of the reel board 312, but can be applied to all cables crossing the inside of the case member 400.

  In addition, in FIG. 11, reference numeral 441 is a function separation relay terminal plate.

In the slot machine 1 configured as described above, the case member 400 is mounted on the outer main body 100, and the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory in a state of a completed product in which necessary wiring is completed. Then, the completed product is attached to the gaming machine installation island of the game arcade. At this time, as shown in the imaginary line in FIG. When fixing with the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted into the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 from the inside of the case member 400 through the skylight 443, The fixing member 601 is tightened through the skylight 443 with a tool 602 such as a screwdriver to securely connect the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the gaming machine installation island. Since a plurality of through holes 132 are provided, the through holes 132 can be arbitrarily selected and used as needed. For example, even if the position and size of the upper rail 600 vary, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper rail 600 can be selected. Further, when the whole gaming machine is replaced, by changing the through hole 132 to be used, it is possible to prevent a problem that a hole of the fixing member 601 is opened at the same position of the upper rail 600 (a so-called fool hole).

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 25, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like is used to cool the image display body 500 (not shown). Then, through the gap S from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 to the vent 133 of the back plate 104, from there, it escapes into the gaming machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, which acts like a barrier to block the gap S over a wide area, so that the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked at this portion, and the wiring relay member 113 It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat radiation effect is high.

  As described above, the general slot machine 1 has been described. The features of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 46 is a perspective view of a housing of the slot machine 1A according to the present invention. The slot machine 1A according to the present invention is provided with a first MAX input button 206 and BET lamps 614 (first BET lamps 614a to 614c) corresponding to the first MAX input button 206. These three first BET lamps are appropriately referred to as first BET lamps 614.

  Apart from the first BET lamp 614, the slot machine 1A according to the present invention has a second MAX input button 2000 and a BET lamp 2010 (second BET lamps 2010a to 2010c) corresponding to the operation of the second MAX input button 2000. Is installed. These three second BET lamps will be appropriately referred to as second BET lamps 2010.

  The first MAX input button 206 is provided in the vicinity of the starting lever 210 as in the normal slot machine 1. On the other hand, the second MAX input button 2000 is provided near the lower part of the right reel stop button 211c. This has the advantage that when the player is right-handed, after performing the reel stop operation with the right hand, the next MAX insertion operation can be performed without extending the right arm to the position of the first MAX insertion button 206. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the time loss until the next game is started and to expect the effect of eliminating the burden on the right arm.

  However, it is not always necessary to set the second MAX input button 2000 at the above position. For example, it is conceivable to set it at the lower center of the reel stop buttons (211a, 211b, 211c). Also, at first glance, by installing the first MAX input button 206 in a manner distinctly different from the first MAX input button 206 as if it were a kind of effect button, it is possible to give the expectation of the effect button as a MAX input button. It can be effective.

  In addition, the second MAX input lamp 2000 can be pressed when “press the second MAX input button” is displayed on the image display body 500 (described later). One of the one MAX input lamp 206 and the second MAX input lamp 2000 can be selected and pressed.

  When the first MAX insertion button 206 is pressed, when there are three or more credits in the three-betting machine, the first 1-BET lamps 614a and 614b are used based on the fact that three credits are consumed. , 614c are sequentially turned on. On the other hand, when the second MAX input button 2000 is pressed, the second BET lamps 2010a, 2010b, 2010c are sequentially turned on almost simultaneously with the consumption of three credits.

  When either the first MAX input button 206 or the second MAX input button 2000 is pressed, both BET lamps (first BET lamps 614a to 614c and second BET lamps 2010a to 2010c) are always turned on. You can do it. However, the lighting timings of the first BET lamp 614c and the second BET lamp 2010c must be synchronized.

  The use of the first MAX input button 206 and the second MAX input button 2000 will be briefly described. In the game (internal lottery) immediately preceding the game, when the player wins the slow BET pattern, the second MAX input button 2000 operations are activated. When the player advances the game by pressing the second MAX input button 2000, the second MAX input button 2000 is pressed in accordance with an expected condition (for example, a case where it is determined that the number of additional games of the ART game is 100 or more). The lighting timing of the BET lamp 2010a, the second BET lamp 2010b, and the second BET lamp 2010c is turned on later than usual.

  As a result, it is possible to play a game with expectation even for operations and display modes that generally have little change, such as pressing the MAX input button and turning on the BET lamp.

[Symbol of each reel, symbol row]
As an example, as shown in FIG. 47, on each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, a symbol row (arranged from No. 1 to No. 21) formed by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at regular intervals. A reel band (symbol band) on which a total of 21 symbols are indicated is attached. FIG. 47 shows a state in which the symbol rows written on the respective reel bands 321a, 321b 321c attached to the respective reels 301a, 301b, 301c are developed in a plane. In addition, the said arrangement | sequence number is described for convenience for identifying the symbol arrange | positioned in the symbol row.

  Each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has a predetermined number (for example, three) of continuous symbols among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, and the opening 401 (a symbol display window; The display window 401 is unified so as to be visible to the player via the display window 401 (see FIG. 48 described later). The symbol display window 401 corresponds to a symbol display section described in the solution.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the types of the symbols are “red seven” symbol, “blue seven” symbol, “white seven” symbol, “BAR symbol”, “cherry” symbol, “replay” symbol, and “bell 1” symbol. "," Bell 2 "," watermelon ", and" correct "designs. The “correct” symbol is a symbol corresponding to a role of a logo described later. However, when the player wins the role of the logo, the “correct” symbol is not necessarily displayed on the activated line, but is displayed on the apparent 5 lines, so that the player can see the “correct” symbol. Looks like

  In FIG. 47, the “red seven” symbol has two arrangement numbers 3 and 6 in the reel band 321a, one arrangement number 12 in the reel band 321b, and one arrangement number 10 in the reel band 321c. One corresponds. The "blue seven" symbol corresponds to one of the array numbers 16 in the reel band 321a, one of the array numbers 3 in the reel band 321b, and one of the array numbers 15 in the reel band 321c. The “white seven” symbol corresponds to one of the arrangement numbers 20 in the reel band 321a, one of the arrangement numbers 19 in the reel band 321b, and one of the arrangement numbers 18 in the reel band 321c. The “BAR” symbol corresponds to one of the array numbers 11 in the reel band 321a, two to the array numbers 6.9 in the reel band 321b, and one to the array number 2 in the reel band 321c. The "cherry" symbol is one of the array numbers 10 in the reel band 321a, the array numbers 1, 14, and 17 in the reel band 321b, and the array numbers 7 and 14 in the reel band 321c. The two correspond. In the reel band 321a, there are five “Replay” symbols of sequence numbers 1, 4, 7, 12, and 17, and in the reel band 321b, sequence numbers 0, 5, 8, 8, 11, and so on. In the reel band 321c, five of No. 16, No. 16, No. 13, No. 13, and No. 17 correspond. There are three "Bell 1" symbols in the reel band 321a, namely, array numbers 13, 15, and 18, and in the reel band 321b, array numbers 2, 7, 10, 15, 15, and 18. In the reel band 321c, three arrangement numbers 9th, 12th and 16th correspond. The “Bell 2” symbol corresponds to three arrangement numbers 2, 5, and 8 in the reel band 321a, and two arrangement numbers 0 and 4 to the reel band 321c. The “watermelon” symbol has three arrangement numbers 9, 14, and 19 in the reel band 321 a, two arrangement numbers 4 and 13 in the reel band 321 b, and three arrangement numbers in the reel band 321 c. No. 6, No. 11, No. 20 correspond. The "correct" symbol corresponds to one of the array numbers 0 in the reel band 321a, one of the array numbers 20 in the reel band 321b, and one of the array numbers 18 in the reel band 321c. Note that the types of symbols are only examples, and are not limited to these types.

[Frame member]
FIG. 48 shows an enlarged portion of the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401. From the symbol display window 401, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol row of each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be visually recognized. From the top, the three positions where the symbol is displayed are referred to as “upper (or upper position)” (for example, the position where the “bell 1” symbol of the reel 301a is displayed), and “middle (or middle position)” (for example, , "Replay" symbol on the reel 301b), and "lower (or lower position)" (for example, the position where the "bell 1" symbol on the reel 301c is displayed).

  From the above, it is possible to display “the number of stages × the number of reels” symbols in the symbol display window 401. Accordingly, in the slot machine 1, nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 at maximum based on “the number of stages (3) × the number of reels (3)”.

  Various lamps are provided on the left end of the frame member 501 (also referred to as a display panel, hereinafter, unified as the display panel 501) (left side as viewed from the symbol display window 401), among which "BET1" and "BET2" "And" BET3 "are the BET lamps (bet lamps) 614. The numbers of the BET lamps (numbers 1, 2, and 3 of" BET1, "" BET2, "and" BET3 ") are as follows. Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets, the number corresponding to the number of medals bet), that is, "1" is one bet (the number of medals bet is one), and "2" is one. Two bets (the number of medals bet is two) and "3" correspond to three bets (also referred to as a MAX bet, the number of medals bet is three). In order to BET1 The first BET lamp 614a, BET 2 lamp pump referred to first BET lamp 614b, BET 3 lamp and first BET lamp 614c.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effective arrangement is determined according to the number of bets. This “valid arrangement” is also called an effective line. Hereinafter, it is referred to as an effective line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is determined to be displayed as a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one activated line. That is, even if the respective symbols constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination are individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, if the respective symbols are not arranged on any of the activated lines (that is, the predetermined symbol is not displayed). If the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not arranged on the activated line), it is not determined that the combination mode of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. In this manner, when the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination are not arranged on the activated line, it is determined that the various combinations of the symbols (that is, the combinations of the lost symbols) are displayed.

  Next, the bet number and the activated line will be specifically described. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a machine dedicated to betting three coins, and in a base game, the game can be executed when three medals are inserted. At this time, the straight-line arrangement rising to the right and the linear arrangement falling to the right become effective lines.

  Note that the effective lines are not limited to the above-described straight-up linear arrangement and downward-sloping linear arrangement. Furthermore, although the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a machine dedicated to betting three, the number of active lines may be changed in accordance with the number of bets instead.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the bet amount is only 3 bets (MAX bet), and “BAR-Replay-White Seven” is displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. Only two lines, that is, a line (that is, a line descending to the right) 623b and a line displaying “Bell 1-Replay-Bell 1” (that is, a line 623a that descends to the right) are set as effective lines.

  The combination of the symbols displayed in the symbol display window 401 in FIG. 48 is “Bell 1-Replay-Bell 1” displayed on the lower right line 623a which is one of the activated lines. Is a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination (replay combination), as shown in FIG. 54 described later, so that in the next game, a bet is automatically made without inserting medals, and the same game as the previous game is played. It is possible to execute again. Even if "Bell 1-Replay-Bell 1" is displayed on the activated line, it is difficult for the player to grasp at a glance which combination of the symbol combination is displayed. However, the combination of the symbols “Replay-Replay-Replay” is displayed on the middle line that is not the active line, so that the player can know that the player has won the replay.

  In addition, the display panel 501 is provided with lamps and LEDs that can be turned on (or flashed) in accordance with the gaming state of the slot machine 1. These lamps are, from the top of the figure, an error lamp 604 with a character “ERR” drawn, a replay lamp 606 with a character “REP” located just below the BET lamp 614, and “STR”. , A medal IN lamp 610 with the character “INS” drawn thereon, and a payout number display LED 612 having two horizontally arranged 7-segment LEDs. In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of the bonus game described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying the total number of medals paid out in the bonus game and the like, and counting the bonus game are separately provided. Is also good.

  The credit display LED displays the number of medals (the number of credit data) stored in the memory of the main board 409 as data.

  The error lamp 604 starts to light (or blinks) when any trouble, failure, or the like occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, and indicates that the trouble or the like is currently occurring to the player or the like (the staff in the hall, etc.). Including).

The replay lamp 606 has a role of notifying the player that a replay (a game can be performed again without betting a new medal) can be performed when the game result is a replay (described later).

  The start lamp 608 starts lighting (or blinking) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet, and has a role of urging the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation).

  The medal IN lamp 610 has a role of urging the player to bet by continuing to light (or blink) until the bet number reaches the maximum (MAX bet).

  The payout number display LED 612 has a role of notifying the player of the payout number of medals by displaying the payout number (the number of payout medals) when there is payout of medals accompanying the game result.

[Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 48 schematically illustrates the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like provided in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game. On the main board (main control board) 409, a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input / output interface 1116 and the like are mounted. ing.

  The one-sheet input button 205, the first MAX input button 206, the second MAX input button 2000, the start lever 210, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, the storage release switch 209, and the like are all connected to the main board 409. These operation buttons can detect a player's operation using a sensor (not shown) and output a detected operation signal to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 300 (starting rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a , 211b, and 211c, an operation signal for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is output to the main board 409.

  Hereinafter, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are called a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b, and a right reel stop button 211c.

  The slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main board 409, and various signals are input to the main board 409 from these devices. The devices include a symbol change display device 300, a medal discharge device 110, and the like.

  The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor is composed of a stepping motor, and each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c can rotate and stop independently, and at the time of rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously displayed from the top to the bottom in the symbol display window 401. It is displayed while changing. The reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c correspond to a movable display driving means. By the stepping motor, each reel can be rotated by a predetermined number of symbols during a freeze process described later.

  The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c have position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c for detecting reference positions for rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c have position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c, respectively. (Left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, stop position information of each reel can be obtained on the main board 409.

  In the medal selector 207, the above-described solenoid 207a and the insertion sensor 207b are provided. The insertion sensor 207b detects a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203, and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is off, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out so that the insertion of medals is not accepted. The medals that have flowed through the return gutter 213 to the return trough 213 return to the medal tray 201. At this time, since the function of the insertion sensor 207b is invalidated, neither the betting nor the storing of medals by inserting medals is performed.

  The medal discharge device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the paid out medals one by one in the discharge opening 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input from the payout sensor 110e to the main board 409. Have been. The auxiliary storage box 111 for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 111a, and when the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal indicating that the medals exceed the predetermined quantity is sent to the main board. 409. At this time, an error display notifying the abnormality of the medal storage is performed by the image display body 500, the error lamp 604, and the like, thereby notifying the player, the hall employee, and the like that the abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variation display device 300 and the medal discharge device 110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c described above is output from the main board 409. In addition, a drive signal is input from the main board 409 to the medal discharge device 110 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the activated line, and in response to this, the medal discharge device 110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal discharge device 110 or there is no medal at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 110e is delayed. After a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, three seconds), an abnormality signal of the payout medal is output from the payout sensor 110e to the main board 409, and in response to this, the main board 409 notifies that the abnormality has occurred in the payout of the medal. Is displayed on the error lamp 604, the image display body 500, or the like to notify that the player, the hall employee, or the like has an abnormality.

  The slot machine 1 includes effect control boards 510 and 520 in addition to the main board 409. The effect control board 510 is usually configured by a chip, whereas the effect control board 520 is configured such that, for example, an encryption key used for encryption / decryption of program data is configured as hardware outside the chip. And a so-called security chip in which data in the chip cannot be exposed.

  On the effect control board 510, a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input / output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, an AMP (audio amplifier) 1126, a sound source IC 1128, and the like are mounted. The CPU 1138, the ROM 1140, the RAM 1142, and the like are mounted on the effect control board 520. The effect control board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409 and performs bidirectional communication with the effect control board 520 to display the image display body 500 and emit light (or light, Blinking, extinguishment, etc.), light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishment, etc.) of the effect lamp 2020 and operation of the speaker 512 are controlled.

  As described above, the effect control board 520 is configured by a so-called security chip, and data related to the game specifications is stored and held in the ROM 1140 of the effect control board 520, thereby preventing the data related to the game specifications from being analyzed or tampered with. Can be prevented. In this case, fraud refers to, for example, analyzing the game specifications and falsifying the program so that the game is played with an advantageous rate for the player, as well as copying the data related to the game specifications as it is And so on.

  The data stored in the ROM 1140 of the effect control board 520 composed of a security chip does not necessarily need to be all of the data related to the game specifications. Can be prevented. Further, effect control board 510 and effect control board 520 are not limited to being separate boards, and may be mounted on one board. Further, receiving various command signals from the main board 409 is not necessarily limited to the effect control board 510 formed of a normal chip, and the effect control board 520 formed of a security chip is not limited to the main part. Various command signals may be received from the substrate 409.

  Further, when the external relay terminal plate 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the game hall via the external relay terminal plate 131. The external relay terminal plate 131 has a role of relaying various signals (insertion medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200.

  In addition, the power supply device 112 includes a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed outside the slot machine 1, and can be operated only by opening the door-shaped front member 200. The power switch 112v is for turning on and off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for changing the settings (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. . The reset switch 112u is used to cancel an error that has occurred in the slot machine 1, and is also operated when setting is changed together with the setting key switch 112t.

  The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In the game by the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the number of medals to be wagered is determined, each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotates, and thereafter, the player stops the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c. Is operated, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c are controlled to stop. When all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of the symbols on the activated line, and the necessary result is determined. In accordance therewith, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination are awarded.

  As described above, the reel bands 321a, 321b, 321c are respectively attached to the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (see FIG. 47). Then, when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, the display content (combination of the symbols displayed on the activated lines) of the symbol displayed on the symbol display window 401 is changed to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination. It is determined whether the combination mode has been displayed. Specifically, in the symbol display window 401, at least one of the above-mentioned effective lines (the upward-sloping line 623b and the downward-sloping line 623a) displays a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination. Is determined. At this time, if the combination of symbols corresponding to different winning combinations is displayed in an overlapping manner on the upward-sloping line 623b and the downward-sloping line 623a, the combination of symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is simultaneously displayed. It is determined that the number of medals has been displayed, and medals are paid out in a quantity obtained by adding up the respective payout numbers. That is, the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the plurality of winning combinations are displayed on the activated lines in the symbol display window 401 in an overlapping manner.)

  In the following, the case where the combination mode of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the activated lines will be referred to as the symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is referred to as a winning combination symbol). It is said that the combination is complete or the winning combination is complete.

  The symbols of the slot machine 1 include “red seven” symbol, “blue seven” symbol, “white seven” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “cherry” symbol, “replay” symbol, “bell 1” symbol, “bell 2” symbol. As mentioned above, there are "Seven", "Watermelon" and "Correct" symbols. Of these, "Red Seven", "Blue Seven", "White Seven" and "BAR" The design is more conspicuous and easier to identify than other designs. Here, the ease of identification means the degree to which the player can easily identify the symbols, including the state where the reels are rotating and the reels are stopped. These symbols can be easily stopped and operated so that the symbols are stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player performs a stop operation because of the color and the size of the symbols even while the reel is rotating. (That is, it is easy to push).

  These symbols are only symbolic symbols by themselves (one symbol alone does not correspond to the winning combination), but a predetermined combination results in a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination. . That is, a predetermined game privilege is provided. In the following, a description will be given of combinations of symbols that are allowed corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG.

[Combination of winning role and design]
Here, a winning combination (including a winning combination) of the slot machine 1 and a combination of symbols corresponding thereto will be described with reference to FIGS. 50, 51, and 52 to 53. Although details will be described later, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute both the main lottery and the pseudo lottery in one game as an internal lottery related to the formation of a winning combination. FIG. 50 is a view showing a winning probability for each winning combination in the main lottery of the slot machine 1, and is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like as a hit value determination table. FIG. 51 is a view showing each winning combination in the lottery ("winning combination" indicates "abbreviation" in FIGS. 50 and 51) in the present specification, and a condition apparatus established corresponding to each of the winning combinations. And stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like. FIGS. 52 to 53 are diagrams showing combinations of symbols and the number of medals paid out corresponding to each condition apparatus, which are also stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance.

  As the gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a general state, a normal RT, a chance RT, a bonus inside, and a bonus inside are prepared. The winning probability for each winning combination is determined for each gaming state, as shown in FIG. Then, when a winning combination is won as a result of the lottery, a reel stopping process described later is performed so that the present condition device corresponding to the winning combination is operated and a symbol combination corresponding to the operated present condition device is displayed on the activated line. Is performed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, one condition device and one reel control pattern correspond one-to-one, so if one wants to prepare a plurality of reel control patterns for one winning combination, It is necessary to establish a plurality of condition devices for one winning combination. In this way, it is possible to prepare a plurality of stop appearances (combinations of symbols displayed on the activated lines) for one winning combination. Here, examples of the symbol combination displayed on the activated line include “RB1 + watermelon”, “watermelon”, “AT (“ AT2-1 ”to“ AT5-4 ”)”, and “ALL” shown in FIG. This will be described in detail below.

  “RB1 + watermelon” is an overlapping role in which RB1 and watermelon (small item 22) are simultaneously overlapped and won. At this time, the condition apparatus corresponding to both RB1 and watermelon (small item 22) is activated, and a combination of symbols corresponding to these is allowed to be displayed on the activated line. The reel stop processing of S5 is performed. When the combination of the symbols corresponding to the watermelon (small items 22) is displayed on the activated line, for example, five medals are paid out as a prize, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to RB1 is displayed on the activated line. Then, the RB1 game described later is started.

  However, even if both the combination of the symbol corresponding to RB1 and the combination of the symbol corresponding to the watermelon (small item 22) are allowed to be displayed on the activated line, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the watermelon (small item 22) is allowed. Is displayed on the activated line with priority. Here, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the watermelon (small items 22) is allowed to be displayed on the activated line only in the selected game. On the other hand, the combination of symbols corresponding to RB1 is not limited to the selected game, and is continued on the activated line until the symbol combination corresponding to RB1 is displayed on the activated line even in the next game and thereafter. It is allowed to be displayed.

  Note that the overlapping combination means a combination in which a plurality of combinations are simultaneously selected in one lottery opportunity. For example, when a winning combination whose winning status is carried over after the next game is selected in the first game, but a symbol combination corresponding to the carrying role is not displayed, for example, the first combination is played in the second game. When they are selected, both the carryover role and the first role are in a winning state, but in this case, since they are selected at different lottery opportunities, they do not correspond to overlapping roles. . Conversely, a single combination means a combination in which only one combination is selected in one lottery opportunity.

  In addition, BB1, BB2, RB1, and RB2 are set as a bonus combination, and a combination (for example, cherry, watermelon, bell, etc.) in which payout of medals is used as a small combination in FIGS. Normal rip etc.) as a replay combination, and when it is permitted to simultaneously display a plurality of symbol combinations on the activated line, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the priority order of the replay combination, small combination, and bonus combination A reel stop process described later is performed so as to be displayed on the activated line.

  “Watermelon” is a single winning combination of watermelon. At this time, a combination of symbols corresponding to watermelons is allowed to be displayed on the activated line, and based on this, a reel stop process in step S5 described later is performed. When the combination of the symbols corresponding to the watermelon is displayed on the activated line, for example, five medals are paid out as a prize.

  As a result of the lottery, even if one of the winning combinations is won, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped in the symbol display window 401 (that is, on the activated line) within a range where the pull-in control described later can be executed. If the stop operation (the operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) is not performed so as to be performed, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination cannot be displayed on the activated line. Therefore, as a result of the lottery, even if one of the winning combinations is won, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the activated line, it is determined in step S6 described later that the game result is lost. Is determined.

  "AT2-1" to "AT5-4" ("AT2-1" to "AT5-4" in this specification are "AT2-1", "AT2-2", "AT2-3", "AT2- 4, "AT3-1", "AT3-2", "AT3-3", "AT3-4", "AT4-1", "AT4-2", "AT4-3", "AT4-4" , "AT5-1", "AT5-2", "AT5-3", and "AT5-4" mean all of the AT-dedicated roles). The number of medals to be paid out as a prize is different between when the stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated and when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are not operated in the respective proper pressing order.

  Specifically, the appropriate pressing order for “AT2-1”, “AT2-2”, “AT2-3” and “AT2-4” is “middle → left → right”. When the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in the proper pressing order, the symbol combination of the accessory 17 among the activated condition devices is allowed to be displayed on the activated line. , A reel stop process in step S5 described later is performed. When the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the pay line, for example, nine medals are paid out as a prize. Since the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the accessory 17 are arranged within a range in which the pull-in control of the reels can be executed, the result of the lottery is “AT2-1”, “AT2-2”, “AT2-3”. Or "AT2-4", the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is always displayed on the activated line as long as the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an appropriate pressing order.

  Further, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an improper pressing order, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an appropriate timing, for example, two medals are paid out as a prize. The combination is displayed on the active line. However, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at inappropriate timing, the symbol combination of the loss is displayed on the activated line. At this time, a medal as a prize is not paid out.

  That is, when the result of the lottery is “AT2-1”, “AT2-2”, “AT2-3” or “AT2-4”, as long as the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an appropriate pressing order, The symbol combination of the bell is displayed on the activated line. However, if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an improper pressing order, and if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an appropriate timing even if the pressing order is improper, a prize is obtained. The combination of symbols for which one medal is paid out is displayed on the payline. Further, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at inappropriate timings not only in the pressing order but also in the timing, the lost symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. At this time, a medal as a prize is not paid out.

  The above-mentioned “appropriate timing” when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an improper pressing order includes the case where the lottery result is “AT2-1” or “AT2-3” and the case of “AT2-3”. -2 "or" AT2-4 ". More specifically, “appropriate timing” when the result of the lottery is “AT2-1” or “AT2-3” means that the result of the lottery is “AT2-2” or “AT2-4”. When the result of the lottery is “AT2-1” or “AT2-3”, the result of the lottery is “AT2-2” or “AT2-4”. ”Is“ appropriate timing ”.

  Further, the proper pressing order for “AT3-1”, “AT3-2”, “AT3-3” and “AT3-4” is “middle → right → left”, and “AT4-1”, “AT4” The appropriate pressing order for “−2”, “AT4-3” and “AT4-4” is “right → left → center”, and “AT5-1”, “AT5-2”, “AT5-3” and The proper pressing order for “AT5-4” is “right → middle → left”. Then, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in the proper pressing order, the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is allowed to be displayed on the activated line. A reel stop process is performed. However, if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an improper pressing order, and if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an appropriate timing even if the pressing order is improper, a prize is obtained. The combination of symbols for which one medal is paid out is displayed on the payline. If the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at inappropriate timings not only in the pressing order but also in the timing, the lost symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. Here, when the result of the lottery is “AT3-1”, “AT3-3”, “AT4-1”, “AT4-3”, “AT5-1” and “AT5-3”, “appropriate timing” "Indicates that the result of the lottery is" AT3-2 "," AT3-4 "," AT4-2 "," AT4-4 "," AT5-2 ", and" AT5-4 ", respectively. "Appropriate timing", and the lottery result is "AT3-1", "AT3-3", "AT4-1", "AT4-3", "AT5-1" and "AT5-3". The “improper timing” indicates that the result of the lottery is “AT3-2”, “AT3-4”, “AT4-2”, “AT4-4”, “AT5-2”, and “AT5-4”. "Improper timing" in this case.

  When the result of the lottery is any one of "AT2-1" to "AT5-4", the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an inappropriate pressing order, and the reels are stopped at an inappropriate timing. The lost symbol combination displayed on the pay line by operating the buttons 211a to 211c is referred to as "bell bump" in this embodiment.

  “ALL” is a hand to be subjected to the lottery only during the bonus game, and when the result of the lottery is “ALL”, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in any pressing order and at any timing. Even if there is, the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is allowed to be displayed on the activated line, and based on this, the reel stop process of step S5 described later is performed. As described above, the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the accessory 17 are arranged within a range in which the reel pull-in control can be executed. Therefore, when the result of the lottery is “ALL”, the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is always set. Is displayed on the active line. When the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the pay line, for example, nine medals are paid out as a prize.

  Here, a bonus role (BB1, BB2, RB1, RB2), a replay role (also called a replay role), a small role (bell role, cherry role (cherry 1, cherry 2), a watermelon role and an AT role, ALL role) , Bonus game exclusive role) will be described. Generally, cherry 1 is called weak cherry and cherry 2 is called strong cherry.

[Bonus role]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a bonus combination such as BB1, BB2, RB1 or RB2 is won and a combination of symbols corresponding to any of these combinations is displayed on the activated line, the BB1 game, the BB2 game, A bonus game such as the RB1 game or the RB2 game is executed. This bonus game is a game in which a player is provided with an opportunity to concentrate and acquire medals over a plurality of games. However, as shown in FIG. 52, only a BB1 game and a BB2 game can obtain a large amount of medals.

In the slot machine 1, a symbol combination (the symbol combination shown in FIGS. 52 to 54) corresponding to the activated condition device is provided on at least one of the effective lines of the upward-sloping line 623b and the downward-sloping line 623a. When the game is stopped, a prize according to the symbol combination stopped on the payline is awarded as one game result. However, in this case, if a combination of symbols corresponding to the two winning combinations is displayed simultaneously on two activated lines such as the upward-sloping line 623b and the downward-sloping line 623a, the combination of the two symbols is determined. Medals will be paid out as prizes. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of activated lines is two, but the number of activated lines is three or more, and the three activated lines are simultaneously overlapped to correspond to three or more winning combinations. When a combination of symbols to be displayed is displayed, a medal corresponding to the combination of three or more symbols may be paid out as a prize. However, the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game (for example, 15) is predetermined, and the number of medals to be paid out as one game result does not exceed this maximum number.

[Replay role]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a replay combination (also referred to as a replay combination), a normal replay (described as “normal lip” in FIG. 50) and ART replays 1 to 3 (“ART lip 1” in FIG. 50) “ART lip 2” and “ART lip 3” are prepared. The combinations of symbols corresponding to the replay combination are as shown in FIGS. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed on the activated line, it is determined that the replay symbol combinations are complete. As shown in FIG. 54, the combination of symbols corresponding to the above-mentioned replay combination includes those that are difficult for the player to grasp immediately. By displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay", the player can grasp that the player has won the replay.

  When the symbol combination of the replay is displayed on the activated line, a game privilege called a replay game is given. In this replay game, the same game as the game in which the symbol combination of the replay is displayed can be executed as a replay without inserting a medal or performing a betting operation again. Even if the replay symbol combination is displayed on the activated line, a medal as a prize is not paid out.

  The feature of the gaming privilege of this replay game is that instead of not paying out medals, it is not necessary to consume new medals (betting new medals) in the next game. In addition, since the replay is a winning combination without paying out medals, it can be said that, for example, by increasing the winning probability, even if the winning frequency increases, there is very little disadvantage to the hole. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, in the normal state (corresponding to the general state and the normal RT in the present embodiment), the probability of winning is approximately once every 6 to 7 times (details will be described later). This makes it possible to keep the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) within a certain range. In other words, the winning combination called replay can have a role of suppressing excessive consumption of medals in the progress of the game.

  Further, the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are arranged evenly on each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination and the symbols constituting the combination of the replay combinations are also used). By changing the number of other symbols (symbols that do not constitute the combination of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination) arranged between the corresponding symbol and the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols from one to a maximum of four, The combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination can be arranged without the need for eye contact.

  When a symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay is displayed on the activated line, the same game as the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay is displayed can be executed as a replay, but the replay When the symbol combination corresponding to No. 2 (the symbol combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” among the symbol combinations corresponding to ART Replays 2 and 3) is displayed on the activated line, this is a trigger for shifting to the chance RT. It is functioning.

[Cherry role]
As described above, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with “Cherry 1” and “Cherry 2” as the cherry role. The combinations of symbols corresponding to the cherry combination are as shown in FIGS. Then, when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the cherry combination is displayed on the activated line, it is determined that the combination of the symbols of the cherry combination is complete, and a medal (for example, two) as a prize is paid out.

[Role of watermelon]
The combinations of the symbols corresponding to the watermelon combination are as shown in FIGS. When the combination of the symbols corresponding to the watermelon combination is displayed on the activated line, it is determined that the combination of the symbols of the watermelon combination has been completed, and a medal (for example, five) as a prize is paid out.

[AT exclusive role]
As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with “AT2-1” to “AT5-4” as AT dedicated roles. The combinations of the symbols corresponding to the AT exclusive combination are as shown in FIGS. That is, when the result of the lottery is any one of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4” and the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an appropriate pressing order, the activated A combination of symbols corresponding to the accessory 17 is displayed on the pay line. However, even if the result of the lottery is any one of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4”, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are not operated in an appropriate pressing order, the above-described case is performed. As described above, a symbol combination in which one medal is paid out as a prize is displayed, or a lost symbol combination is displayed. The symbols constituting the combination of the symbols for which one medal is paid out as a prize are arranged on each reel so that the symbols can be displayed on the activated line without being pressed. Note that, in the case of the AT-only combination “AT2-1” to “AT5-4”, even if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in a forward push, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the small articles 17 is an effective line. It is not displayed above.

[Role of ALL]
The symbol combinations corresponding to the ALL combination are as shown in FIGS. However, even if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in any order of pressing and at any timing, the reel combination is controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the accessory 17 of the operated condition apparatus is displayed on the activated line. Controlled.

[Special Bonus Game]
Further, there is a bonus game exclusive role as a winning combination that is valid only during the bonus game (during the BB1 game, BB2 game, RB1 game, and RB2 game). The bonus game exclusive combination corresponds to “logo 1” to “logo 7” in FIG. 50, and the combinations of the corresponding symbols (bonus game exclusive combination design) are as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54. . However, as described above, when the “logo 1” to “logo 7” as the bonus exclusive combination are won, the “regular” symbols appear to be aligned on the apparent five lines.

  When the bonus game exclusive symbols are completed during the bonus game, a specified number of medals (for example, 10) are paid out. The payout of medals at this time is performed in the game. In other words, when the bonus game exclusive combination symbols are aligned, a gaming privilege of paying out 10 medals is provided. Then, during the bonus game, by making the bonus game exclusive combination easier to collect, it is possible to collectively execute a plurality of games in which medals can be easily obtained. Therefore, each symbol constituting the combination of the bonus game exclusive combination symbols can be aligned on the activated line without performing the eye-catching.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the bonus game, the bonus game exclusive combination and the ALL combination are set as the lottery targets. However, different winning combinations may be provided. Further, a bell role or a watermelon role may be used instead of a winning role limited during a bonus game such as a bonus game exclusive role. In this case, the number of paid out medals may be changed between during the general state and during the bonus game.

[Additional lottery]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the lottery during the bonus game is any of the role of Cherry (Cherry 1 and Cherry 2), the special role for the bonus game (Logo 1 to Logo 7), the role of Watermelon, and the chance. In this case, an additional lottery is performed as a process on the effect control board 520 side. In general, the role that triggers the extra lottery, such as the role of Cherry (Cherry 1 and Cherry 2), the special role for the bonus game (Logo 1 to Logo 7), the role of the watermelon and the chance, is called "Rare Small Role". Called. The details of the execution lottery of the bonus game and the additional lottery of the bonus game will be described later. In addition, when the result of the lottery in the normal state (general state, normal RT) is a rare small combination, a bonus game providing lottery is performed.

  The bonus game is a game in which both the control of the chance RT, which is the processing of the main board 409, and the control of the AT, which is the processing of the effect control board 510 (push order navigation), are performed. As long as the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped in accordance with the push order navigation, the bonus game continues until the end condition of each bonus game is satisfied. When the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped against the pushing order navigation, bells may appear on the effective line, and when the bells appear, a chance RT by the main board 409 may occur. Is terminated. When the end condition of each privilege game is satisfied, the control of the AT by the processing on the effect control board 510 side ends, and it becomes difficult to avoid the belly. Therefore, the appearance of the belly on the main board 409 side. The control of the chance RT, which is the processing of (1), is also terminated (normal RT is performed). Even if the control of the chance RT by the main board 409 is ended as a result of the stop operation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c against the pushing order navigation, the control of the AT, which is the processing of the effect control board 510, is not performed. Unless the game ends, the chance RT is controlled again, and the bonus game is continued. Therefore, “addition of a bonus game” is strictly speaking “addition of an AT game”. Hereinafter, in this specification, for convenience, when “addition of a bonus game” or “addition of a bonus” is referred to. There is. Similarly, the “condition for ending the privilege game” is, strictly speaking, the “condition for ending the AT game”. Hereinafter, in this specification, for convenience, the “condition for ending the privilege game” and the “ It may be referred to as “end condition”.

  The probability of loss in the internal lottery is controlled to a game state that is extremely lower than the normal state (general state, normal RT), or controlled to the chance RT1 in the internal lottery of no loss in the internal lottery as in the present embodiment. The symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay becomes extremely high, so that even if the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay is displayed, it is difficult to determine whether or not the additional lottery has been performed in the AT game. Become. By doing so, if an expected production that may interest the player, such as the possibility that an additional lottery may have been performed or that the additional lottery may have been won, the expected It is possible to perform it.

[Loose]
If any of the combinations of the symbols shown in FIGS. In the lost game, no medals are given, and the next and subsequent games are not changed. In addition, it can be said that the losing is a role that does not grant any gaming privilege to the player in the game and the next and subsequent games.

  The above is the combination of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and the symbol corresponding to each winning combination.

  It should be noted that these symbols are not limited to the symbols and the combinations of the symbols described above. Further, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided in addition to the above symbols. Then, the number of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not necessarily limited to providing all of them, and a required type of winning combinations may be appropriately selected.

[This lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the main lottery (the result of the collation of the extracted random number) is allowed as a winning combination applicable in the game (hereinafter, the applicable winning combination). Here, if the winning combination is permitted, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is operated, and the information on the operated condition device is used as an information command indicating the result of the lottery. Processing, determination processing, payout processing, etc.).

  In the slot machine 1, a range of random number values (this is referred to as an extraction range) when random numbers are extracted in this lottery is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 16383 (that is, 16384 random numbers, which is 2 to the 14th power). In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the random number value of the extraction range is set to 0 to 59999 for convenience, but it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to this. When the range of random number extraction is expanded, the range of random numbers that can be extracted (so-called denominator) becomes larger by that amount, so that an event in which a specific random number value is unevenly extracted is less likely to occur.

  Within the above extraction range, random numbers corresponding to the respective winning combinations are further assigned in advance. For example, if the random number corresponding to RB2 among the random numbers within the extraction range (0 to 59999 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment) is “1”, when the extracted random number becomes “1”, The result of this lottery is "the RB2 has been won", and the condition device of the RB2 is processed as an information command in the game. Also, by using this, the winning probability of RB2 (the probability that RB2 is selected as a result of the main lottery, the lottery probability) can be calculated from the extraction range and the random number value corresponding to RB2. In the above example (RB2), when the total number of random values corresponding to RB2 is divided by the total number of random values in the extraction range, the value is 1/60000, and the winning probability of RB2 is 1/60000. Can be calculated.

  In this way, random numbers corresponding to all the winning combinations are determined, and these random numbers are called winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In the above example (RB2), the random value “1” within the extraction range is a hit value corresponding to RB2. If there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of the predetermined combination is a continuous random number “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” within the extraction range, the predetermined combination is The value range is from random number values “1” to “4”. Then, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any one of the random number values “1” to “4” (collated), it means that “the predetermined combination has been won” as a result of this lottery. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to a single role (for example, RB2, Bell 1, Bell 2, etc.) that wins only one winning role, an overlapping role (for example, “RB1 + Watermelon "," BB1 + bell 2 ", etc.). Therefore, with respect to such a duplicate combination, the winning value of the duplicate combination is also included in the above-mentioned winning value.

  From this, all winning combinations have their hit value range determined, and it is determined whether the extracted random number value extracted in this lottery corresponds to the winning value range of any winning combination. Become. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning value of any of the winning combinations, a loss occurs. That is, the range of the winning value of the loss is outside the range of the winning value of all the winning combinations. In addition, the winning value may be called a winning allowable value.

  By the way, the single combination is one winning combination corresponding to one extracted random number value, and the overlapping combination is a plurality of (two in this case) winning combinations for one extraction random number value. Is the corresponding one. That is, when the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the duplicate combination, it means that any of the plurality of winning combinations has been won. For example, when the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value corresponding to “BB1 + watermelon” shown in FIG. 50, a process of setting the condition device corresponding to a winning combination in an internal lottery process described later (see FIG. 73). In step S206), as shown in FIG. 51, the condition apparatus corresponding to BB1 and the condition apparatus corresponding to watermelon are simultaneously established.

  According to FIG. 50, during the bonus, the winning value of the ALL combination and the bonus game exclusive combination (logo 1 to logo 7) occupies most of the extraction range. Therefore, when the bonus game is executed, a large amount of medals are paid out during the period in which the bonus game is executed.

[Control by main board]
Next, a processing procedure on a control program executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 and the like) of the slot machine 1 will be described. However, the processing procedures described in this specification are simplified for convenience of explanation of the present invention.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram simply showing a processing procedure of a basic one game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S10, various setting processes including an initial setting for preparing for a game start are executed. In particular, when starting up the power supply, etc., check the connection and operation status of the various devices described above, check whether backup data exists, and if backup data exists, return to the state before power off. Execute

  In the BET process in the next step S100, the pressing operation of the first MAX insertion button 206 (or the one-sheet insertion button 205) is performed based on the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or when there is already stored medals. , The bet amount is set, and the operation of the start lever 210 is awaited. That is, the BET process is performed until the number of bets for one game is set and the start lever 210 can be operated. Note that the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a dedicated three-bet machine capable of executing a game by inserting three medals. Therefore, the one-sheet insertion button 205 need not be provided. Although details will be described later, when the operation of the second MAX input button 2000 is possible, the bet amount is set even when the operation of pressing the second MAX input button 2000 is performed.

  In the internal lottery process of step S200, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 which is in the operation waiting state in step S100, and the internal lottery process is executed. In this internal lottery process, processes such as a main lottery, a pseudo game execution lottery, a pseudo lottery, and a precursor game number lottery of the pseudo lottery, which will be described later, are performed. Only when one of the roles is selected in the main lottery or the pseudo lottery, the present condition device or the pseudo condition device operates according to the selected role and corresponds to the operated present condition device or the pseudo condition device. It is allowed that the symbol combination stops on the active line.

  Next, in the reel control process of step S300, for example, when a stop operation of the rotating reels 301a, 301b, 301c is performed, all reels 301a, 301b, 301c are processed based on the result of the internal lottery process of step S200. Executes control related to rotation and stop.

  In the game state transition process of step S400, the process of transitioning the game state based on the result of the internal lottery or the game result while information communication from the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 to the main board 409 is not performed. Execute. The details of the game state transition processing will be described later.

  In the bonus game type determination process in step S500, a process of estimating the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 on the main board 409 side is executed.

  In the bonus game process of step S600, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is being executed. If the bonus game is not being executed, a bonus game setting process for enabling the execution of the bonus game is performed. If it is being executed, a bonus game end determination process or the like is executed. Details of the bonus game process will be described later.

  By the way, although not shown in FIG. 55, in the main board 409, a command transmission process is also performed in addition to the process on the control program described above. In this command transmission processing, the processing result on the control program executed on the main board 409 (for example, the result of the internal lottery processing or the reel control processing) is transferred from the main board 409 to the effect control board 510 (or the effect control board) each time. 520).

  The above is the simple processing procedure of one basic game of the slot machine 1. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, although details will be described later, the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520 are not transmitted while the information communication from the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 to the main board 409 is not performed. Is performed on the main board 409 side (principal game type determination processing described later), and based on the estimated result, the internal lottery processing in step S200 and the subsequent steps in step S200 and step S300 are performed. A reel control process is performed.

  Of the processing procedures on the control program executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 and the like), the game state transition processing in step S500 will be described first for convenience, then the privilege game type determination processing in step S500 and step S600. After describing the bonus game process, the bet process of step S100, the internal lottery process of step S200, and the reel control process of step S300 will be described.

[Game state transition processing]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

  In the game state transition processing, first, it is determined whether or not a bonus game (BB1, BB2, RB1, and RB2 games) is being performed (step S401). If it is during the bonus game (YES in step S401), It is determined whether or not the bonus game has ended (step S402). The determination as to whether or not the bonus game has ended is made by setting the BB game in-flight flag set in the BB game end determination processing described later or the RB game in-flight flag set in the RB game end determination processing described later to 0 (off). If so, it is determined that the bonus game is over. When the bonus game is over (YES in step S402), a transition process to a general state is performed (step S403). In this general state, when the game is executed for a certain period, the number of medals bet by the player to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game during the certain period. In other words, the general state is a gaming state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game. If it is determined in step S402 that the bonus game has not ended (NO in step S402), the process of step S403 is skipped, and the game state is not shifted.

  If it is determined in step S401 that the bonus game (BB1, game BB2, RB1 game, RB2 game) is not in progress (NO in step S401), it is determined whether the bonus game is in progress (step S410). That is, when the player wins the bonus combination (BB1, BB2, RB1, RB2) in the main lottery, the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not displayed on the activated line, the operation continues until the symbol combination (bonus symbol) corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line even after the next game. When it is determined that the bonus combination is being performed (YES in step S410), and that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line (YES in step S412), the process proceeds to the bonus state (step S412). Step S414), a bonus game is executed.

  When it is determined in step S410 that the bonus is not inside (NO in step S410), it is determined whether or not it is a chance RT (step S420). If it is the chance RT (YES in step S420), it is determined whether or not a bonus has been won in the internal lottery process (step S422). The process is executed (Step S424). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S422 that no bonus has been won (NO in step S422), it is determined whether or not “bell bumps” are displayed on the activated line (step S426). If it is determined at this chance RT that "bell bumps" have been displayed on the activated line (YES in step S426), the process proceeds to normal RT (step S428). The process for winning a bonus in step S424 will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S420 that it is not a chance RT (NO in step S420), it is determined whether or not normal RT is being performed (step S430). During normal RT (YES in step S430), it is determined whether or not a bonus has been won in the internal lottery process (step S432). If it is determined that a bonus has been won (YES in step S432), the process at the time of the bonus win Is executed (step S434). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S432 that the bonus has not been won (NO in step S432), it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 2 has been displayed on the activated line (step S436). If it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to No. 2 has been displayed on the activated line (YES in step S436), the process proceeds to a chance RT (step S438).

  When it is determined in step S430 that it is not normal RT (NO in step S430), the gaming state is controlled to the general state. Also in this general state, it is determined whether or not a bonus has been won in the internal lottery process (step S440), and if it is determined that the bonus has been won (YES in step S440), the process at the time of winning the bonus is executed (step S440). S442). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S440 that no bonus has been won (NO in step S440), it is determined whether or not "bell bumps" are displayed on the activated line (step S450). In this general state, when it is determined that “bell bump” is displayed on the active line (YES in step S450), the process proceeds to normal RT (step S452).

  Next, the process of winning a bonus in steps S424, S434, and S442 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the same process is performed in the bonus winning process performed in step S424, step S434, and step S442. FIG. 57 is an example of a flowchart showing the process at the time of winning a bonus.

  In the bonus winning process, first, the bell counter is set to FF (step S462). Although details will be described later, in the bonus game type determination processing in step S500, the result (type of bonus game) determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 is estimated on the main board 409 side using a bell counter. Is being processed. However, even if the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 determines that the bonus game is to be executed, the bonus game is executed with higher priority than the bonus game when the bonus is won. It is set to FF.

  After setting the bell counter to FF in step S462, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination (bonus symbol) corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line (step S464). Here, when it is determined that the bonus symbol is displayed on the activated line (YES in step S464), the process proceeds to the bonus (step S466). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S464 that the bonus symbol has not been displayed on the activated line (NO in step S464), the process proceeds to the inside of the bonus (step S468), and the bonus winning process ends.

  Here, each gaming state will be described. In the normal RT, as in the general state, when the game is executed for a certain period, the number of medals bet for the player to execute the game is smaller than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game during the certain period. Will increase. That is, the normal RT is a game state in which, as in the general state, when the player executes the game, the number of medals decreases accordingly.

  Note that the probability of each winning combination being won in this lottery in the general state, the normal RT, the chance RT, the inside of the bonus, and the gaming state during the bonus is as shown in FIG.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the result information of the internal lottery is output from the main board 409 to the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 and the CPU 1138 of the effect control board 520 as an information command. The CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 (or the CPU 1138 of the effect control board 520) that has received the internal lottery result information output from the main board 409, based on the result information and the communication result information with the main board 409, generates, for example, an image. There is provided a means for executing an effect using the display body 500 and / or the speaker 512.

  For example, at the chance RT, when the result of the lottery is any one of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4”, the appropriate pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is, for example, the image display 500 And / or specified by an effect using the speaker 512 (hereinafter, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c performed when the result of the lottery is any one of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4”) The designation of the proper push order is referred to as “push order navigation”). As described above, when the result of the lottery is any one of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4”, the effect of clearly indicating to the player the appropriate pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is as follows. The game is executed as a bonus game at the chance RT. The bonus game is executed at a high frequency by continuously or continuously performing the pushing order navigation.

  Thus, during the bonus game, during a predetermined period (period of executing a plurality of games), the number of medals paid out as a result of the game is larger than the number of medals bet for the player to execute the game. It is different from the state and the normal RT. The push order navigation may be performed, for example, even in the general state or the normal RT, but is not performed continuously over a plurality of games as in the bonus game. Therefore, when the result of the present game lottery is any one of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4”, the chance that the bonus game is being executed is greater than when the general state or the normal RT is controlled. When controlled by RT, it becomes easier for the player to display the symbol combinations corresponding to "AT2-1" to "AT5-4" on the payline. Further, in the chance RT, the probability of the deviation is extremely lower than that in the case of being controlled in the general state or the normal RT. From these points, it can be said that the chance RT is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the general state or the normal RT.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, except for the inside of the bonus and the inside of the bonus, the slot machine 1 is controlled to one of the normal state (general state or normal RT) and the gaming state including the chance RT. .

  In the present gaming machine, when the normal replay combination is selected in the main game lottery at the chance RT, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of the replay 1 is displayed in a rotating state so that the symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. Stop control of the reels 301a to 301c is performed. Note that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 1 is a combination in which a replay symbol is displayed in a middle row that is not an active line.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, when a symbol combination corresponding to the replay 2 is displayed in the main game lottery at the normal RT and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 2 is displayed, the next game is controlled to the chance RT. .

  Here, the chance RT is a game in a game period from the start of the chance RT to the display of “bell bumps” on the activated line or the winning of the bonus. As can be seen from the above, the winning probability of replay is made easier to win than in the general state. In the chance RT, the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 uses the image display body 500, for example, as a bonus game in order to avoid displaying “bell bumps” on the active line for a certain number of games. And / or an effect using the speaker 512 is executed. That is, when the result of the present game lottery is any one of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4”, an appropriate pressing order is used so that “bell bumps” are not displayed on the activated line. An effect that prompts operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, an effect that prompts operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c at appropriate timing, and the like are executed.

  By operating the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c based on the effect promoted in this way, the chance RT can be continued for a certain number of games. Then, when a certain number of games are executed, the bonus game is ended, that is, the effect for preventing the “bell bump” from being displayed on the activated line is ended. Then, any one of "AT2-1" to "AT5-4" is won in the game lottery, "Bell-Bobome" is displayed on the activated line, and the chance RT ends. Becomes

In addition, during the chance RT, the game is executed in such a manner that the player can recognize (identify) that the gaming state is the chance RT. Specifically, it can be identified by a display indicating that the chance RT is being performed (by the image display body 500 or the like) or by a sound effect (by the speaker 512 or the like).

  The slot machine 1 is provided with a plurality of set values (six levels from 1 to 6) (not shown). In each set value, a difference (a stepwise difference, an extreme difference, or the like) is given to the game lottery probability. The higher the setting value, such as setting value 1 <setting value 2 <setting value 3 <setting value 4 <setting value 5 <setting value 6, such that the bonus winning combination and the main game lottery probability of the ART replay are preferentially set. It is good to be done. For example, when the setting value 6 is higher than the setting value 1, the winning probability of BB1 is determined to be higher, so that the possibility of winning BB1 is higher. By providing the stepwise set values in this manner, each of the set values is given a feature to provide a clue for the player to guess the set values, or to set the slot machine 1 with the set values according to the management of the hall or the like. And can be used. Note that the present invention is not limited to the above set values.

[Privilege game type determination processing]
A process of estimating a result determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 on the main board 409 side while information communication from the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 to the main board 409 is not performed (privileges) Performing the game type determination process) has been described above. The privilege game type determination process (step S500) will be described below.

  As described above, although the result information of the processing performed on the main board 409 (for example, the result information of the lottery and the stop symbol information) is transmitted from the main board 409 to the effect control board 510, the effect control board 510 and the effect control The result information of the processing performed on the substrate 520 is not transmitted to the main substrate 409. Therefore, even if the bonus game to be executed among the seven types of bonus games is determined by the rendering control board 510 or the rendering control board 520, such determination is made secretly to the main board 409, The board 409 cannot grasp the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 as it is. Therefore, in the present slot machine 1, the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 is determined without performing the information communication from the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 to the main board 409. A bonus game type determination process (step S500) is performed to make it possible to make a determination according to step S409.

  Hereinafter, the bonus game type determination process (step S500) on the main board 409 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of a navigation lottery table used for the bonus game type determination processing. This navigation lottery table is stored in both the ROM 112 of the main board 409 and the ROM 1140 of the effect control board 520 composed of a security chip. Note that the main board 409 is also formed of a security chip. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraud such as analysis / falsification of game specifications. The navigation lottery table in FIG. 58 does not necessarily need to be stored in the ROM 1140 of the effect control board 520 composed entirely of a security chip. A part of the data (for example, only the data when the bell counter is 3) may be stored in the ROM 1140 of the effect control board 520 constituted by the security chip.

  The result of this lottery is transmitted from the main board 409 to the effect control board 510 as described above. When the bonus game type determination processing is performed on the main board 409, not only the result information of this lottery but also the bell The counter information is also transmitted from the main board 409 to the effect control board 510. The bell counter is information used when the main board 409 performs the bonus game type determination processing, and is set to “FF” in a normal state when the bonus game type determination processing is not performed on the main board 409. Then, when the bonus game type determination processing is started on the main board 409, it is set to "0", and is set to any one of "1" to "4" according to the progress of the game. When the bonus game type determination processing is not performed on the main board 409, there is no need to transmit a bell counter from the main board 409 to the effect control board 510.

  The effect control board 510 determines that the lottery result information is “AT2-1” to “AT5-4” on condition that it is determined that any one of the seven types of privilege games is to be executed. Information that can specify which one of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4” (hereinafter simply referred to as “AT2-1” to “AT5-4”). Push order navigation is executed based on the transmission of “information indicating that there is” from the main board 409 so that the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the activated line. On the other hand, during the normal time in which it is not determined that the bonus game is to be executed, even if information indicating that the result information of this lottery is “AT2-1” to “AT5-4” is transmitted from the main board 409, , The push order navigation described above is not executed.

  In a case where it is determined that any one of the seven types of privilege games is to be executed, if the bell counter information is not transmitted from main board 409, effect control board 510 It is determined that the type determination processing has not been started yet. However, the effect control board 510 determines that any of the seven types of privilege games is to be executed, and that the lottery result information is “AT2-1” to “AT5-4”. Is transmitted from the main board 409, but the bell counter information is not sent, in order to start the privilege game type determination processing on the main board 409, the pushing order navigation is always executed.

  On the other hand, when both the bell counter information and the result information of the main lottery are transmitted from the main board 409, the effect control board 510 determines that the privilege game type determination processing has been started on the main board 409, and When the lottery result information is any one of "AT2-1" to "AT5-4", it is determined whether or not to execute the push order navigation based on the table of FIG. More specifically, it is determined that the pressing order navigation is to be executed when the circle corresponds to the circle shown in FIG. 58, and it is determined not to execute the pressing order navigation when the cross corresponds to the circle illustrated in FIG. 58.

  As can be understood from FIG. 51, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the result of the main lottery is any one of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4”, the player sets “left → center”. The symbol combination of the accessory 17 is not displayed on the active line as long as the right-to-right push or the left-to-right-to-medium scissor push is performed. Therefore, the main board 409 determines that the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the pay line when the push order navigation is performed by the effect control board 510 and when the push order navigation is performed. However, it is limited to the case where the player does not stop operation by the forward push or the scissor push, but accidentally corrects the push order. Therefore, when the main board 409 determines that the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the activated line, it starts the bonus game type determination processing assuming that the pressing order navigation has been performed by the effect control board 510, Set the bell counter to 0.

  In other words, the main board 409 according to this embodiment has the bell counter set to “FF” (the bonus game type determination process has not been started), and the main board 409 is in the normal lottery state. If the patterns corresponding to the result information being any one of "AT2-1" to "AT5-4" are prepared, the effect control board 510 executes one of the seven types of privilege games. Is presumed (push order navigation is provided) and the bell counter is updated from “FF” to “0” to start the bonus game type determination process.

  However, in such a control method on the main board 409 side, the result information of this lottery is “AT2-1” to “AT5-” even though the pressing order navigation is not provided on the effect control board 510 side. 4), the effect control board 510 executes one of the seven types of privilege games even if the stop operation mode of the player accidentally matches. It may be inferred that the decision has been made, and eventually the bell counter is updated from “FF” to “0” and the privilege game type determination process is erroneously started. Therefore, in the main board 409 according to the present embodiment, while updating the bell counter in the bonus game type determination processing, a diagnosis on the appropriateness of such estimation is also performed. If the result of this diagnosis indicates that the game is not appropriate, it is determined that the effect control board 510 has not determined to execute any of the seven types of privilege games (the above-mentioned guess is incorrect). Control is performed to terminate the bonus game type determination process at an intermediate stage (update the bell counter to “FF”).

  Further, in the control method on the main board 409 side, when the effect control board 510 side decides to execute any of the seven types of privilege games, the game is performed in a manner in which the push order navigation is reversed. When the player performs a stop operation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the privilege game type determination processing fails. That is, even if the type of privilege game to be executed among the seven types of privilege games is determined on the effect control board 510 side, the player does not stop the reels 301a, 301b, 301c without following the pushing order navigation. Then, the main board 409 erroneously estimates that the bonus game has been determined to be a different type from the bonus game of the type actually determined on the effect control board 510 side, and the bonus game type determination is performed. Processing fails. However, the fact that the privilege game type determination processing has failed can be grasped on the effect control board 510 side from the fact that the player has performed the stop operation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c without following the pushing order navigation. it can. When the privilege game type determination processing has failed, the privilege game type determination processing is performed again.

  By the way, when the bonus game type determination processing is performed, the main board 409 side produces an effect unless it is determined that any of the seven types of bonus games is not determined to be executed in the above-described diagnosis of adequacy. It is determined that a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) of privilege games (the processing performed on the effect control board 510 side is an AT game) is started on the control board 510 side. Since the main prayer 409 does not know whether or not the bonus game type determination processing has failed, the control processing is performed on the premise that the bonus game is being played until the predetermined number of games has elapsed. Specifically, until the predetermined number of games elapses, it is determined that the answer is YES in step S311 described later, and the process proceeds. As described above, the game period in which the control by the main board 409 is performed on the premise that the bonus game is in progress even though the bonus game has not actually been started due to the failure of the bonus game type determination processing will be described below. This is called a semi-privilege game period.

  In the semi-privilege game period, the difference between the number of medals paid out as a prize and the number of medals provided for the execution of the game is managed, and the effect control boards 510 and 510 are controlled such that the difference approaches zero. Control by 520 is performed. More specifically, every time the game ends, a command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the effect control boards 510 and 520, as to the difference number information at the time the game ends. When the difference number information is positive (when the number of medals paid out as a prize is larger than the number of medals provided for the execution of the game), the push order navigation is performed as processing on the effect control boards 510 and 520. Is controlled not to be performed. As a result, the difference number approaches zero.

  Further, when the difference number information transmitted from the main board 409 to the effect control boards 510 and 520 is negative (the number of medals used for executing the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a prize). (When there are many), control is performed so that the push order navigation is performed as the processing on the effect control boards 510 and 520, and as a result, the difference number approaches zero. Then, when the half privilege game period ends, the privilege game type determination processing is performed again.

  The privilege game type determination process performed in this manner is repeated until a proper guess is made on the main board 409 side, that is, the privilege game of the type actually determined on the effect control board 510 side is executed. The bonus game type determination process is repeatedly performed until the side guesses. The above-mentioned number of medals is not limited to the number of medals, and it goes without saying that the number of game media other than medals represented by credit data is included, for example.

  As described above, when the bonus game type determination processing has failed, the bonus game type determination processing is performed again after a half bonus game period in which the difference number is controlled to be 0, so that the player wastes time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reels 301a, 301b, 301c from being stopped in the push game navigation in the bonus game type determination process. In addition, even for a player who does not intend to disobey the pushing order navigation but erroneously performs the stop operation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the game is controlled so that the difference number becomes zero. It is possible to prevent a large loss from being given to a person, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Hereinafter, the bell counter updating process after the bell counter is updated from “FF” to “0” will be described in detail.

(When the bell counter is 0)
When the bell counter is 0, the main board 409 updates the bell counter to 1 if the result of the main lottery in the next game is any of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4”. If the result of this lottery is not any of "AT2-1" to "AT5-4", the bell counter is not updated (the bell counter remains 0). Then, the main board 409 transmits the result of the main lottery and the bell counter to the effect control board 510.

(When the bell counter is 1)
When the effect control board 510 receives from the main board 409 information indicating that the result of the lottery is any one of "AT2-1" to "AT5-4" and information indicating that the bell counter is 1 from the main board 409, It is determined that the bonus game type determination processing has been started on the board 409, and it is determined whether or not to execute the push order navigation based on the table in FIG. However, as described above, the push order navigation is performed on the condition that it has decided which privilege game to be executed (that the player has won the privilege granting lottery). Even if has been started, if the lottery has not been won, the effect control board 510 performs the push order navigation even if the result information and the bell counter information of the main lottery are transmitted from the main base 409. Never. Therefore, if the bonus game type determination process is started on the main board 409 because the player does not stop the operation with the forward push or the scissor push and accidentally corrects the push order, the push order navigation is performed. There is no.

  For example, when the result of the lottery is “AT2-1” and the bell counter is 1, the bonus game to be executed is a short red bonus game, a short blue bonus game, a normal red bonus game, and a normal blue bonus. If it is determined to be one of the games, it is determined that the game is not executed, and if the privilege game to be executed is determined to be one of the super red privilege game, the super blue privilege game, and the premium privilege game, the game is executed. Is determined.

  When the result of the lottery is “AT3-4” and the bell counter is 1, the bonus game to be executed is any one of the short red bonus game, the short blue bonus game, the normal red bonus game, and the normal blue bonus game. It is determined that the push order navigation is to be executed when the bonus game to be executed is determined. Is determined not to be executed.

  Then, the main board 409 narrows down the type of the bonus game in the case of the bell counter 1 based on the determination result as to whether or not the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the activated line and the navigation lottery table in FIG. . For example, when the result of the lottery is “AT2-1” and the bell counter is 1, if it is determined that the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the activated line, the main board 409 is set to the effect control board. Assuming that the push order navigation has been performed by 510, it is determined that the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 has decided to execute any one of the super red privilege game, the super blue privilege game, and the premium privilege game. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery is “AT2-1” and the bell counter is 1, if it is determined that the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is not displayed on the activated line, the main board 409 performs the effect control. The effect control board 510 and the effect control board indicate that one of the short red bonus game, the short blue bonus game, the normal red bonus game, and the normal blue bonus game is to be executed assuming that the push order navigation was not performed by the board 510. 520 is determined. In this way, the main board 409 excludes four or three kinds of privilege games out of the seven kinds of privilege games that may be determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520, and You can narrow down to the type.

(When the bell counter is 2)
The effect control board 510 receives, from the main board 409, information indicating that the bell counter is 2 and information indicating that the result of the lottery is any one of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4”. Whether or not the push order navigation is executed is determined based on whether the result of the lottery is any one of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4” and the information that the bell counter is 1 is received from the main board 409. Is reversed to determine whether or not to execute the push order navigation. That is, as can be seen from the navigation lottery table in FIG. 58, when information indicating that the bell counter is 2 is received from the main board 409, information indicating that the bell counter is 1 is received from the main board 409. If the push order navigation is executed, it is determined that the push order navigation is not to be executed. If the information indicating that the bell counter is 1 is received from the main board 409, the push order navigation is not executed. Decide to execute forward navigation.

  That is, only when the bell counter is 2, the result of the internal lottery when the bell counter is 1 is referred to. Thus, the pressing order navigation can be executed without fail in either the case of the bell counter 1 or the case of the bell counter 2. If it is determined that the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the activated line in both the case of the bell counter 1 and the case of the bell counter 2, it is determined that the player has not operated according to the pressing order navigation. Then, the bonus game type determination processing on the main board 409 is completed, and the bell counter is set to “FF”. Further, in both the case of the bell counter 1 and the case of the bell counter 2, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is not displayed on the activated line, the player operates according to the push order navigation. It is determined that the push order navigation is not performed (that is, the bonus awarding lottery has not been won), the bonus game type determination process on the main board 409 is completed, and the bell counter is set to “FF”.

  As described above, the pressing order navigation is always executed in either the case where the bell counter is 1 or the case where the bell counter is 2. The case where the bell counter is 1 and the case where the bell counter is 2 This is because in any case, the main board 409 determines that the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the pay line. That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 does not determine that the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the pay line as long as the player performs the forward push or the scissor push. Therefore, when the bonus game type determination process is started by accident (the push order is not performed, but the player does not stop the push order or the scissor push, and the push order is incorrectly accidentally corrected. If it is determined that the push order navigation is not to be executed based on the navigation lottery table in FIG. 58 in the case where the game type determination process is started, the bonus game type determination process is started accidentally. On the main board 409 side, it is presumed that the effect control board 510 side has decided to execute any of the seven types of privilege games, and the privilege type determination process proceeds, and the player is useless. It gives expectations.

  In this regard, by inverting the execution of the push order navigation when the bell counter is 1 and when the bell counter is 2, the main board 409 performs the bonus game type determination process and the effect control board 510 performs the push order navigation. Verify that the game was started as a result of being pushed, or that the push order navigation was not performed but the player did not stop by pushing forward or scissoring, and that the pushing order was accidentally started correctly. Becomes possible. In this manner, when the bell counter is 2, while the bell counter is updated in the bonus game type determination processing, a diagnosis on the appropriateness of such estimation is made.

(When the bell counter is 3)
When the effect control board 510 receives from the main board 409 the information indicating that the result of the lottery is any one of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4” and the information indicating that the bell counter is 3 as shown in FIG. Based on the table 58, it is determined whether or not to execute the push order navigation. For example, when the result of the lottery is “AT3-4” and the bell counter is 3, the bonus game to be executed is determined to be one of the normal red bonus game, the normal blue bonus game, and the premium bonus game. Sometimes it is determined not to execute the push order navigation, and when it is determined to be any of the short red bonus game, the short blue bonus game, the super red bonus game, and the super blue bonus game, it is determined that the push order navigation is to be performed. Is done.

  Then, the main board 409 determines, based on the determination result as to whether or not the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the active line and the navigation lottery table in FIG. Do. The main board 409 further includes an effect control board 510 and an effect control board based on the narrowed down determination result of the bonus game type in the case of the bell counter 1 and the narrowed down determination result of the bonus game type in the case of the bell counter 3. A narrowing-down determination of the type of the bonus game that may have been determined in 520 is performed. For example, in the narrowing down determination of the type of the bonus game in the case of the bell counter 1, the narrowing down is performed to any one of the short red bonus game, the short blue bonus game, the normal red bonus game, and the normal blue bonus game. In the game type narrowing-down determination, when the game is narrowed down to one of the short red bonus game, the short blue bonus game, the super red bonus game, and the super blue bonus game, the main board 409 includes the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520. Of the seven types of bonus games that may have been determined by the above, five types of bonus games can be excluded, and only two types of short red bonus games or short blue bonus games can be narrowed down.

(When the bell counter is 4)
When the effect control board 510 receives, from the main board 409, information indicating that the result of the lottery is any one of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4” and information indicating that the bell counter is 4 as shown in FIG. Based on the table 58, it is determined whether or not to execute the push order navigation. For example, when the result of the lottery is “AT4-2” and the bell counter is 4, the bonus game to be executed is one of a short blue bonus game, a normal blue bonus game, a super blue bonus game, and a premium bonus game. Is determined not to execute the push order navigation. When the bonus game to be executed is determined to be any of the short red bonus game, the normal red bonus game, and the super red bonus game, the push order navigation is performed. Is determined to be executed.

  Then, the main board 409 determines whether to narrow down the type of the bonus game in the case of the bell counter 4 based on the determination result as to whether or not the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the activated line and the navigation lottery table in FIG. Do. The main board 409 further includes a narrowed-down determination result of the type of the bonus game in the case of the bell counter 1, a narrowed-down determination result of the type of the bonus game in the case of the bell counter 3, and a type determination of the bonus game in the case of the bell counter 4. Based on the result of the narrowing-down determination, the narrowing-down determination of the type of the privilege game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 is performed.

  For example, in the narrowing down determination of the type of the bonus game in the case of the bell counter 1, the narrowing down is performed to any one of the short red bonus game, the short blue bonus game, the normal red bonus game, and the normal blue bonus game. In the narrowing down determination of the game type, the game is narrowed down to one of the short red bonus game, the short blue bonus game, the super red bonus game, and the super blue bonus game. When the bonus game, the normal red bonus game, or the super red bonus game is selected, the main board 409 sets the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 to the short red bonus game. It can be determined that it is nothing. In this manner, the main board 409 can determine that the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 is the short red bonus game.

  As described above, by performing the narrowing-down determination of the type of the bonus game in the bonus game type determination process, it is determined which of the seven types of the bonus games has been determined by the effect control boards 510, 520, on the effect control boards 510, 520. It is possible to infer on the main base 409 side without transmitting a command from the main base 409 side. Also, in the process of stepping out and narrowing down any one of the seven types of privilege games a plurality of times, the player checks the symbol combination that has been stopped and displayed, so that the player can obtain the desired privilege. It is feasible to create a directing effect as to whether the game has not been excluded yet, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

  The narrowing-down determination of the type of the bonus game can be executed by performing a stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c in the order of the navigation in the pushing order. However, when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are stopped against the push order navigation (that is, in a procedure different from the procedure in which the push order is navigated), the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520 are used. It may be determined that a bonus game of a type different from the type of the bonus game actually determined is determined.

  As described above, even if the main board 409 determines that a bonus game of a type different from the type of the bonus game actually determined by the rendering control board 510 or the rendering control board 520 is determined, the pressing order navigation is performed. Since the stop operation has been performed, the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520 can know that the main board 409 has determined that the bonus game has been determined to be of a type different from the actual type. Therefore, when it is determined by the main board 409 that a bonus game of a type different from the actual game has been determined, the prize actually paid out by the method of the pushing order navigation executed as control on the effect control board 510 side. Can be controlled by controlling the effect control board 510.

  When the main board 409 determines the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520, the determined game (the result of the lottery is any one of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4” And the next game after the game whose bell counter is 4), the execution of the bonus game is permitted, and the control according to the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520 is executed. I do.

[Privilege game processing]
Next, the bonus game process in step S600 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the bonus game process executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409. In the bonus game, as described above, when the chance RT is controlled by the processing of the main board 409, the control of the AT (push order navigation) is performed for a predetermined period by the processing of the effect control board 510. It is. In other words, the bonus game includes control of the main board 409 such as control of the chance RT and freeze control at the end of the bonus game, and control of the effect control board 510 such as control of the AT (push order navigation) and display effect control. Are games performed over a plurality of games. The bonus game process described here is executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

  In the bonus game process, first, it is determined whether or not the chance RT is being performed (step S602). If the chance RT is being performed (YES in step S602), the symbol corresponding to the replay 3 which is the actual opportunity of the bonus game is performed. It is determined whether the combination is displayed on the active line (step S604). When it is determined in step S604 that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 3 is displayed on the activated line (YES in step S604), it is determined whether or not the bell counter is 4 (step S606). Only when it is determined that the bell counter is 4 in step S606 (YES in step S606), the privilege game setting process in step S608 is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S602 that the chance RT is not being performed (NO in step S602), when it is determined in step S604 that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 3 is not displayed on the activated line (NO in step S604). If it is determined in step S606 that the bell counter is not 4 (NO in step S606), the process proceeds to step S610, and it is determined whether the privilege game in-progress flag is on (= 1) (step S606). Step S610). The flag during the bonus game in step S610 refers to the seven types of bonus games described above (short red bonus game, normal red bonus game, super red bonus game, short blue bonus game, normal blue bonus game, super blue bonus game, premium If any of the bonus games is being executed, YES is determined in step S610. If any of the seven types of privilege games is being executed (YES in step S610), a privilege game end determination process (step S620) is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 610 that none of the bonus games has been executed (NO in step S610), the bonus game processing ends.

  When the bonus game setting process in step S608 is performed, an opening effect of the bonus game is performed as control on the effect control board 510 side. Although the opening effect of the bonus game is not shown, a display effect indicating the start of the bonus game is performed on the image display body 500, and an effect sound for elevating the player is output from the speaker 512.

  Note that the privilege game setting process is performed only when the bell counter is determined to be 4 in step S606, during the privilege game or during the execution of the privilege game type determination process described above. This is to prevent the opening effect of the bonus game from being performed when the symbol combination is displayed. That is, as described above, the execution of the bonus game is allowed only when the bell counter is 4, so that the opening effect of the bonus game is not performed when the bonus game is not executed.

  By the way, as long as the stop operation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is performed in accordance with the push order navigation, the bonus game is continued until the end condition of each bonus game is satisfied. When the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped against the push order navigation, bells may appear on the effective line. If the bells appear, a chance RT by the main board 409 may occur. Is completed, and the routine shifts to normal RT. When the end condition corresponding to the running bonus game is satisfied during execution of the bonus game, a freeze process is performed as a process on the main board 409 side, and control of the AT, which is a process on the effect control board 510 side, ends.

  At this time, an ending effect of the bonus game is performed as a process on the effect control board 510 side. When the control of the AT, which is the processing of the effect control board 510, is completed, the navigation in the pressing order is not performed, so that it is difficult to avoid the bell-spot. Then, when the bell-shaped eye appears, the control of the chance RT, which is the processing on the main board 409 side, is also terminated (transition to normal RT). Note that even if the control of the chance RT by the main board 409 ends and the control shifts to the normal RT as a result of the stop operation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c against the pushing order navigation, the processing on the production control board 510 side. Unless the control of the AT is finished, when the symbol combination of the re-game 2 is displayed on the activated line, the game shifts to the chance RT again, and the bonus game is continued. Therefore, the bonus game ends when the control of the AT ends.

  The bonus granting lottery is performed based on a predetermined condition being satisfied. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a rare small role is won, a bonus giving lottery is performed. In other words, when the effect control board 510 receives from the main board 409 that the result of the lottery is a rare small combination, the information is transmitted to the effect control board 520. When the effect control board 520 receives from the effect control board 510 the information indicating that the result of the lottery is a rare minor role, the effect control lottery is performed based on the information. Since the benefit-giving lottery is a lottery that affects the participation rate, it is preferable that the lottery be performed on the effect control board 520 formed of a security chip from the viewpoint of fraud prevention.

  When the player wins the bonus granting lottery, the effect control board 520 determines which of the seven types of bonus games having different degrees of profit for the player is to be executed. In this embodiment, any one of the seven types of privilege games of the short red privilege T game, the normal red privilege game, the super red privilege game, the short blue privilege game, the normal blue privilege game, the super blue privilege game, and the premium privilege game is executed. Is determined.

  As described above, it is determined as to which of the seven types of privilege games having different degrees of advantage for the player is to be executed when the player wins the privilege granting lottery. FIG. 60 is a table showing an example of an end condition of each privilege game (specifically, "end condition of AT control by effect control board 510", the same applies hereinafter). As can be seen from FIG. 60, the short red award game and the short blue award game are bonus games that require, for example, that the number of medals paid out as a prize exceed 50, and are a normal red award game and a normal blue award game. Is a bonus game that requires, for example, that the number of medals to be paid out as a prize exceed 150, and the super red bonus game and the super blue bonus game requires that, for example, a medal paid out as a prize exceed 250. This is a bonus game, and the premium bonus game is, for example, a bonus game that requires that the number of medals paid out as a prize exceeds 26.

  The details of the above seven types of privilege games will be described later, but a short red privilege game, a normal red privilege game, a super red privilege game, a short blue privilege game, a normal blue privilege game, a super blue privilege game, a premium privilege game In the order of, the appearance frequency of the rare small combination with a high degree of rare is increased in the pseudo game (the pseudo game will be described later) in the privilege game. In other words, from the perspective of the expectation of bonus games being added, premium bonus games, super blue bonus games, normal blue bonus games, short blue bonus games, super red bonus games, normal red bonus games, and short red bonus games In this order, it can be said that the bonus game has a high degree of advantage for the player. However, from the viewpoint of the number of executed bonus games, as shown in FIG. 60, the short red bonus game and the short blue bonus game end when the number of payouts exceeds 50, and the normal red bonus game and the normal blue bonus game. The award game ends when the number of payouts exceeds 150, the super red award game and the super award game end when the number of payouts exceeds 250, and the premium award game ends when the number of payouts exceeds 26. Has become.

  When the player wins the award lottery once, such information is transmitted from the effect control board 520 to the effect control board 510, and a set of privilege games is executed by the effect control of the effect control board 510 (specifically, by the main board 409). It is controlled by the RT, and controlled by the effect control board 510 by the AT (the pressing order navigation is executed). Then, when an additional lottery is performed by the effect control board 520 composed of a security chip during the bonus game, the bonus game is added each time the player wins the bonus granting lottery. Then, the bonus game is continued until all the added bonus games are consumed. In addition, the addition of the privilege game is, in detail, the addition of the AT game (push order navigation) by the effect control board 510. The details of the additional lottery will be described later. Hereinafter, the bonus game setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

[Privilege game setting process]
Next, the bonus game setting process in step S608, which is one process of the bonus game process, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a bonus game setting process executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

  In the bonus game setting process, first, the estimation result in the bonus game type determination process in step S500 (that is, the result of inferring the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 on the main board 409 side) is determined. Based on the determination result, the end condition of the corresponding bonus game is set, and the flag during the bonus game for the corresponding bonus game is turned on (= 1).

  Specifically, first, in step S6082, it is determined whether or not the estimation result in the bonus game type determination processing is a short red bonus game. If it is determined in step S6082 that the game is the short red privilege game (YES in step S6082), the ending of the short red privilege game is set such that the medal payout as a prize exceeds 50 (step S6084). Then, in the next step S6086, the short red bonus game in-progress flag is turned ON (= 1).

  If the determination in step S6082 is not satisfied (NO in step S6082), the flow shifts to step S6088 to determine whether the short blue bonus game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied (YES in step S6088), in step S6090, the prize payout of more than 50 medals is set as an end condition of the short red privilege game. Then, in a next step S6092, the in-short-blue bonus game flag is turned ON (= 1).

  If the determination in step S6088 is not satisfied (NO in step S6088), the flow shifts to step S6094 to determine whether the normal red bonus game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied (YES in step S6094), in step S6096, a prize payout of more than 150 medals is set as an end condition of the normal red privilege game. Then, in the next step S6098, the normal red bonus game in-progress flag is turned ON (= 1).

  If the determination in step S6094 is not satisfied (NO in step S6094), the flow shifts to step S6100 to determine whether the normal blue bonus game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied (YES in step S6100), in step S6102, the medal payout as a prize exceeding 150 is set as an end condition of the normal blue bonus game. In the next step S6104, the normal blue bonus game in progress flag is turned ON (= 1).

  If the determination in step S6100 is not satisfied (NO in step S6100), the flow shifts to step S6106 to determine whether the super red privilege game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied (YES in step S6106), in step S6108, the medal payout as a prize exceeding 250 is set as an end condition of the super red privilege game. Then, in the next step S6110, the flag during the super red privilege game is turned ON (= 1).

  If the determination in step S6106 is not satisfied (NO in step S6106), the flow shifts to step S6112 to determine whether the super blue bonus game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied (YES in step S6112), in step S6114, a medal payout as a prize exceeding 250 is set as an end condition of the super blue privilege game. Then, in the next step S6116, the flag during the super blue privilege game is turned ON (= 1).

  If the determination in step S6112 is not satisfied (NO in step S6112), the flow shifts to step S6118 to determine whether the premium privilege game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied (YES in step S6118), in step S6120, a prize payout of more than 26 medals is set as an end condition of the premium privilege game. Then, in the next step S6122, the premium bonus game in-flight flag is turned ON (= 1).

  If none of the above determinations in step S6082, step S6088, step S6094, step S6100, step S6106, step S6112, and step S6118 is satisfied (NO in step S6118), the flow advances to step S6124 to perform error processing. In the error processing, a control to display an image indicating an error on the image display body 500, a control to output a sound indicating an error from the speaker 512, and a case in which the slot machine 1 cannot execute a game. Is performed.

  In step S6086, step S6092, step S6098, step S6104, step S6110, step S6116, or step S6122, if the bonus game in progress flag for the bonus game according to the type is turned on, the bell counter is set to FF (step S6126). . Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a forced freeze flag described later is on (step S6128). If it is determined that the forced freeze flag is on (= 1) (YES in step S6128), a specific reel behavior is set. It is set (step S6130). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6128 that the forced freeze flag is off (= 0) (NO in step S6128), step S6130 is skipped and the privilege game setting process ends.

  When the specific reel behavior is set in step S6130, in the present embodiment, the rotation and stop of the reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c in the next game in the form of the specific reel behavior described below. Is executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409. Here, the specific reel behavior in the present embodiment will be described. First, when the start lever 210 is operated on the premise that the BET processing is performed, the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started based on this. At this time, the rotation speed of each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c should be the same as the normal rotation speed that is not freeze-on in order to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not a specific reel behavior is set. Is preferred. Then, after the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c make two rounds, the left reel 301a and the middle reel are displayed such that the symbol combination of "white seven-white seven-white seven" is displayed at the middle position in the symbol display window 401. It stops in the order of 301b and right reel 301c. After that, the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started again without operating the start lever 210, and when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are operated, based on this, in step S304 described later. The stop of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c is controlled so that the result of this lottery is displayed. In this specific reel behavior mode, the symbol display window 401 starts after the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started based on the operation of the start lever 210 on the assumption that the BET process has been performed. After the symbol combination of “white seven-white seven-white seven” is displayed at the middle position in the display, the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started again without operating the start lever 210. , The behavior of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c in the forced freeze state. The behavior of each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c from when the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started again without operating the start lever 210 until the result of the main lottery is displayed is forced. The behavior is as if the freeze was released.

[Bonus game end determination process]
Next, the privilege game end determination processing in step S620 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S6202, the payout number is subtracted from the number set as the end condition of the privilege game, and the flow proceeds to step S6204.

In step S6204, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts (i.e., the number of remaining payouts) among the number of sheets set as the end condition of the privilege game is equal to or less than "0". If the number of remaining payouts is equal to or less than "0", this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S6206, where the in-game flag for the bonus game according to the type is turned off (= 0). That is, when the short red bonus game flag is on (= 1), the flag is turned off (= 0). When the short blue bonus game flag is on (= 1), the flag is turned off (= 1). 0), if the normal red bonus game flag is on (= 1), turn it off (= 0); if the normal blue bonus game flag is on (= 1), turn it off. (= 0), turn off (= 0) if the Super Red bonus game flag is on (= 1), and turn off if the Super Blue bonus game flag is on (= 1). Is turned off (= 0), and if the flag during the premium privilege game is on (= 1), it is turned off (= 0). Thereby, the privilege game ends. When the bonus game ends, a freeze process is performed as a process on the main board 409 side, and an AT control ends as a process on the effect control board 510 side. At the same time, an ending effect of the bonus game is performed as a process on the effect control board 510 side. Although the ending effect of the bonus game is not shown, a display effect indicating the end of the bonus game is performed on the image display body 500, and an effect sound indicating the ending is displayed so that the player can grasp that the bonus game has ended. Output from speaker 512. Even if the bonus game ends, the chance RT state continues as control by the main board 409, but when the AT game by the effect control board 510 ends, the push order navigation is not performed, so that a bell bump appears, and the main board 409 appears. Is shifted from the chance RT to the normal state.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S6204 is not satisfied, the process in step S6206 is skipped, and the bonus game continues from the next game onward.

[Control of production operation]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the control of various rendering operations is executed by the rendering control board 510 in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect control board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118 and the like) performs bidirectional communication with the effect control board 520 based on various commands (information commands, output signals) output from the main board 409, and controls various effect operations. To do. As described above, various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such an effect mode is stored in the ROM 1120 or the ROM 1140 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

  For example, the effect mode includes one that is completed only with the game (hereinafter, referred to as a single effect mode), one that is performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter, a continuous effect mode), and the like. Among these, the single-shot effect mode includes an effect indicating the winning flag (indicative effect, announcement effect, details will be described later), an effect notifying medal payout (pay appearance, and a mode in which the payout number may be notified). There is.

  The suggested effect is different from the effect (notification effect) in which the winning flag is directly notified to the player, and is an effect in which the winning flag is indirectly notified. For example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag is described. , Colors, etc. are displayed. The suggestion effect is also performed when there is no winning flag (that is, in the case of a loss). In this case, the effect is such that the content is hard to be noticed as a loss (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken with any winning combination). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the game has been lost.

  In the notification effect, for example, when the winning flag is BB, it is possible to clearly know which winning combination the player has won in the game, such as “Bonus determined!”. This effect is more effective when executed for a winning combination (because a large number of medals can be acquired) that is pleasing to a player, such as a BB executed by the main board 409 or a privilege game executed by the effect control board 510. That is, when the player wins the BB, the bonus game, or the like, the meaning of congratulating the player can be given.

  Further, as a continuous effect mode, there is a mode corresponding to a game state such as a general state, a normal RT, a chance RT, and a bonus. These are intended to clarify the state of the game, and by performing these effects (continuous effects), the player has a chance to determine whether the current game state is, for example, normal RT. It is easy to make a distinction as to whether or not RT is in progress.

  During the bonus game, a continuous effect is executed from the start to the end so that the player can recognize that effect. For example, a display that counts the number of games executed and the number of remaining games in each privilege game, and a sound effect that gives a sense of crisis as the number of games approaches the specified number of times is generated. In this way, the player can proceed with the game while checking how many times the number of remaining bonus games remains.

  The above-described effect form can be executed as displaying an image on the image display body 500, generating a sound effect using the speaker 512 or the like, emitting light or lighting using an LED decoration or the like. Such an effect mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression, for example, when the player has been playing the game for a long time. It should be noted that the effect mode is not limited to being executed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, and the like. For example, instead of the image display 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, a doll imitating a character, a movable model, etc., and a side reel (for example, arranged at a position different from each reel, and the start and stop thereof can be performed independently of the player's operation as part of the production) Or an illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light represented by a rotating lamp) to execute various effects. With such a method, it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[BET processing]
Next, the BET processing in step S100 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the BET process, first, it is determined whether or not the result of the previous game was a replay (replay) (step S102). If it is determined in step S102 that the result of the previous game is not a replay (NO in step S102), it is determined whether or not a medal insertion or insertion button operation has been performed (step S104). The medal insertion is to insert a medal as a game medium, and the insertion button operation is an operation to insert electronic data called credit as a game medium (called a BET operation).

  When it is determined in step S104 that a medal insertion or insertion button operation has been performed (YES in step S104), a medal insertion betting number setting process in step S106 is performed. The number of bets may be one to three medals or electronic data equivalent thereto, but in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, only three medals or electronic data equivalent thereto are bet. It is configured as a three bet-only machine that can do.

  Then, on condition that the number of bets has been set, the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated (step S108). When it is determined in step S102 that the result of the previous game is a re-game (YES in step S102), the betting at the re-game in step S110 is performed without inserting any medal or electronic data as a game medium. The number setting process is performed automatically.

[Medal insertion betting number setting process]
The medal insertion betting number setting process will be described with reference to FIG. In the start lever monitoring start process in step S1061, it is monitored whether the start lever 210 has been operated before the operation of the start lever 210 becomes effective. The term "until the operation of the starting lever 210 becomes effective" means that, in a three-bet exclusive machine, the number of bets is set by inserting three medals or credits, and the operation of the starting lever 210 is started as a game starts. Can be performed until the operation becomes effective. Immediately after the bet amount is set, if the bet amount is set without notifying the player (the BET lamp does not light up) and passing through the freeze state (the BET lamp then lights up), During the freeze state, it cannot be said that “the state in which the operation of the start lever 210 can be performed as the start of the game”, so that the state is monitored.

  The operation monitored by the start lever monitoring start process is, for example, a start lever when the player does not start the game even when the start lever 210 is operated to start the game when one medal or credit is inserted. When the operation 210 is performed, three medals or credits have been inserted, but the number of bets has not yet been set (while a slow BET effect described later is being performed). However, the lever operation is performed during a grace period until the player is notified that the number of bets has been set (a slow BET effect described later may be performed during this period. This is also referred to as a freeze state). And the like.

  The “state in which the number of bets has not been set yet” does not correspond to the “state in which the operation of the start lever 210 can be performed as a game start”, and therefore, until the slow BET effect ends (the start of the game). It is monitored whether the start lever 210 has been operated before the required bet amount is set or until the freeze is completed after the bet amount is set. Details of the start lever monitoring start process will be described later.

  After three medals or credits are inserted and the start lever 210 is operated as a game start (YES in step S202 of the internal lottery process), the start lever monitoring end process is executed in step S203. Done. Details of the start lever monitoring end process will be described later.

If it is determined that first MAX insertion button 206 has been pressed (YES in step S1062), it is determined whether the game is a slow BET pattern. The slow BET pattern indicates a lighting mode pattern of the BET lamp of the present embodiment. In other words, the mode of the BET lamp that normally turns on in response to the pressing operation of the MAX input button is turned on while the credit is consumed by the pressing operation of the MAX input button (lighted almost simultaneously with the credit being consumed). However, in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, when the next game is selected as the slow BET pattern in the lottery of the game immediately before the game, the next game ( In other words, the pressing operation of the MAX input button (including both the first MAX input button 206 and the second MAX input button 2000) in the game) changes the lighting mode of the BET lamp. An embodiment is referred to as a "specific embodiment."

  Specifically, first, a normal mode (hereinafter, referred to as a “normal mode”) will be described. The normal mode is, for example, a MAX input button (both the first MAX input button 206 and the second MAX input button 2000 Is pressed, a predetermined number of credits are consumed, and the bet amount is set immediately. The bet amount is set (linked), and the second BET lamps 2010a to 2010c are turned on. From the player's point of view, it means that the BET lamp appears to be lit at the same time as the MAXBET is pressed.

  On the other hand, when the MAX input button (including both the first MAX input button 206 and the second MAX input button 2000) is pressed, a predetermined number of credits are consumed, but the specific mode is a normal mode. The bet amount is not immediately set as in the above, but the bet amount is set with a delay after the credit is consumed. Therefore, even if the MAX input button is pressed, the second BET lamps 2010a to 2010c are not immediately turned on, but the second BET lamp 2010a is turned on first, and then after a predetermined time (for example, several seconds) elapses, the second BET lamp 2010b is turned on. Is turned on, and the second BET lamp 2010c is turned on after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, several seconds) of turning on the second BET lamp 2010b. In other words, the display speed of the BET lamp is displayed later than usual. In the specific mode described above, when the MAX input button is pressed, a predetermined number of credits are consumed, and the bet amount is set with a delay after the credit is consumed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By causing the credits to be consumed with a delay despite being pressed, the display speed of the BET lamp may be displayed later than usual.

  This means that, in the slot machine 1A of the present embodiment, the bet amount is not immediately set even if the credit is consumed by pressing the first MAX insertion button 206 or the second MAX insertion button 2000. I do.

  By the way, the conditions under which the second BET lamp 2010 has the slow BET pattern include, for example, a case where the number of additional games in the ART game is a certain number or more, a case where the ART game is won, and a case where the chance zone is not reached. There is a case where a change is suggested, and the present invention is not limited to these cases. In addition, the case where the number of bonus games is a certain number or more may be used. That is, it is preferable that a condition that allows the player to have expectations is satisfied. However, in the case where the slow BET pattern is used as the gaseous effect, it is not necessary that the condition that the player can have expectations is satisfied.

  If it is determined that the game is a slow BET pattern (YES in step S1064), a slow BET command is transmitted to the sub side (effect control board 510) in step S1066. After the effect control board 510 on the sub side receives the slow BET command, a second MAX input button effect determination process is performed (step S1068).

  When it is determined that the game is a slow BET pattern, the main board 409 determines in which pattern the second BET lamp 2010 should be turned on, and turns it on. The effect control board 510 (sub side) to which the slow BET command has been transmitted activates the effect accessory 2030 with the second BET lamp 2010 in accordance with the lighting mode pattern. Rendering accessory 2030 is stored in second BET lamp 2010c, and can be displayed in a form that can be visually recognized by a player when a predetermined slow BET command is received.

  The production role 2030 may be a golden lion-like design, a cute animal shape, or a beautiful diamond shape. Importantly, these accessories are usually stored so that they do not appear on the surface of the housing, and as described above, can be displayed on the surface of the housing if necessary for production. That is.

  By the way, the flow after YES in step S1062 of the medal insertion betting number setting processing describes that the effect of the slow BET pattern is performed even when the first MAX insertion button 206 is pressed, but in step S1068 The reason why the second MAX input button effect determination process is performed is as follows.

  Usually, the player proceeds with the game by pressing the first MAX input button 206. This is because the second MAX input button 2000 is located at a position different from the MAX input button installed in the ordinary slot machine 1 (below the left reel stop button 211a, the middle reel stop button 211b, and the right reel stop button 211c). One of the reasons is that it is installed. In other words, if it is normal to perform the pressing operation of the first MAX input button 206, even if the timing of pressing the second MAX input button 2000 and proceeding with the game is over, from the habit of the game operation up to now, There is a possibility that the opportunity to press the second MAX input button 2000 is missed and the first MAX input button 206 is pressed.

  However, even in such a case, by performing the second MAX insertion button effect determination process in step S1068, even if the player presses the first MAX insertion button 206 in the slow BET pattern, the second BET insertion button effect is determined. A slow BET effect using the lamps 2010a to 2010c can be shown. This is a remedy for a player who misses the opportunity to press the second MAX input button 2000.

  If it is determined that the game is not a slow BET pattern (NO in step S1064), it is determined whether the game is a gasslow BET pattern (step S1070). A gaseous throw BET pattern is a condition in which a lottery result in a game immediately before the game is determined to be a slow BET pattern, but a predetermined condition (for example, a state in which an ART game cannot be won) in the game. Is not established.

  On the other hand, if the game is determined to be a gasslow BET pattern (YES in step S1070), a gasslow BET command is transmitted to the sub side (effect control board 510) (step S1072). After the effect control board 510 on the sub side receives the gaseous throw BET command, gaseous second MAX input button effect determination processing is performed (step S1074).

  If it is determined that the game is not a gasslow BET pattern (NO in step S1070), a first MAX insertion button effect determination process is performed (step S1076). This indicates that the lighting is performed in the same lighting mode as the BET lamp mounted on the normal slot machine 1 (the normal mode described above). Specifically, the first BET lamps 614a to 614c are sequentially turned on almost at the same time as the first MAX insertion button is pressed, the predetermined number of credits are consumed, and the bet amount is set.

  Next, when it is determined that the first MAX input button 206 has not been pressed (NO in step S1062), it is determined whether the second MAX input button 2000 has been pressed (step S1078). If it is determined that second MAX insertion button 2000 has been pressed (YES in step S1078), it is determined whether the game is a slow BET pattern (step S1080).

  If it is determined that the game is a slow BET pattern (YES in step S1080), a slow BET command is transmitted to the sub side (effect control board 510) (step S1082). When the effect control board 510 on the sub side receives the slow BET command, a second MAX input button effect determination process is performed (step S1084).

  If it is determined that the game is not a slow BET pattern (NO in step S1080), it is determined whether the game is a gasslow bet pattern (step S1086). If it is determined that the game is a gasslow BET pattern (YES in step S1086), a gasslow BET command is transmitted to the sub side (effect control board 510) (step S1088). When the effect control board 510 on the sub side receives the gasslow BET command, a gasse second MAX input button effect determination process is performed (step S1090).

  If it is determined that the game is not a gasslow BET pattern (NO in step S1086), a first MAX input button effect determination process is performed (step S1092). This indicates that the player can select and play the first MAX input button 206 and the second MAX input button. The above-described pattern (in the case where the processing is not the gasslow BET pattern and the first MAX insertion button effect determination process is performed) is, for example, a case where the slow BET pattern has been won in the game immediately before the game concerned. However, there is a case where the game is not a gasslow BET pattern, that is, a case where the player has advanced the game by pressing the second MAX input button 2000 in the game in a situation where no expectation can be made.

  As described above, in the game immediately before the game, in a situation where the predetermined condition (eg, winning the ART game) is not satisfied, even if the second MAX input button is pressed in the game. Even if the player plays the game, the BET lamp is lit in the same manner as when the first MAX input button 206 is pressed in a situation where the predetermined condition is not satisfied at all (the normal mode described above). Do).

  By the way, in the three-betting machine, when there are three or more credits and the image display 500 does not display “press the second MAX input button”, the first MAX input button 206 is pressed. It is preferable that the light is turned on to prompt the player to press the first MAX input button 206 (that is, the second MAX input button 2000 is not turned on by default). By doing so, the player does not have to be confused which MAX input button should be pressed.

  However, this does not prohibit the pressing operation of the second MAX input button 2000. That is, the player may select any of the first MAX input button 206 and the second MAX input button 2000 for the operation of performing the MAX input. However, when one pressing operation is performed, the other pressing operation must be invalidated.

[Start lever monitoring start processing]
The start lever monitoring start process will be described. In the start lever monitoring start process (step S1061), as described above, for example, when one medal or credit is inserted (that is, three medals or credits are set as the bet number in a three-betting gaming machine). It is monitored whether or not the operation of the start lever 210 has been performed, for example, in a state where the operation of the start lever 210 has not been performed as the start of the game. "The start lever 210 cannot be operated to start the game" means that the game is started when the bet amount is set and the game is frozen (during a slow BET effect). The case where the operation of the starting lever 210 is not effective is included.

  In the slot machine 1A of the present embodiment, if a specific condition is satisfied, an effect of changing the lighting mode of the BET lamp (BET lamp effect / slow BET effect) is performed at the timing when medals are inserted or credits are consumed. Therefore, a slow BET effect may be performed even when one medal is inserted. When a slow BET effect is performed, a freeze time of several seconds to several minutes is provided.

  For a player who wants to proceed with the game quickly, the freeze time due to the performance of the slow BET effect may be rather annoying. In such a case, the slow BET effect can be skipped (including fast-forward or immediate termination) by operating the start lever 210 before the setting of the number of bets is completed or during the effect. The expression “skip the slow BET effect” also applies to the expression “shortening the freeze state”. It is the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 that skips the slow BET effect.

  After the slow BET effect has been skipped by operating the start lever 210, if three medals have already been inserted or the credit has been used up, three medals are inserted. The BET lamp is immediately turned on, and the bet number is set or the bet number setting is valid. Then, the game can be started by operating the starting lever 210 again.

  In the start lever monitoring start process, as described above, the operation of the start lever 210 performed before the start of the game is monitored instead of the operation of the start lever 210 for starting the game, so as to match the game style of the player. (A slow BET effect or shortening or canceling of a frozen state) can be provided. In other words, the production can be skipped even in the middle of the slow BET production, so it is possible to avoid the hassle of spending time on the freeze production in the valuable time before closing the hall, so the production is troublesome Can be prevented from deteriorating.

[Second MAX input button effect determination process]
The second MAX input button effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. When it is determined in the medal insertion betting number setting process that the second MAX insertion button effect determination process is to be performed (see steps S1068 and S1084 in FIG. 66), the second MAX insertion button effect determination process is performed. It is determined whether the 1 BET lamp is lit (step S1162). The fact that the 1 BET lamp is turned on indicates that the second BET lamp 2010a is turned on, but does not deny the case where the first BET lamp 614a is turned on.

  By the way, when it is determined in the medal insertion betting number setting processing that the second MAX insertion button effect determination processing is to be performed, it is preferable that the player presses the second MAX insertion button 2000 to advance the game. It is preferable to induce the second MAX input button 2000 to be pressed (the effect of the effect visible to the player is increased). For example, "press the second MAX input button" is flashy displayed on the image display body 500, the second MAX input button 2000 is flashed flashing, or a sound is emitted.

  If the one-bet lamp is not turned on (NO in step S1162), it is determined whether the one-bet flag is on (step S1164). The state in which the 1-BET flag is ON is a state in which at least one medal has been inserted, a state in which the one-sheet insertion button 205 has been pressed, and at least one sheet by pressing the first MAX insertion button 206. Indicates that the condition that the second BET lamp 2010a is turned on is satisfied by the state where the credit of the second BET lamp 2010a has been consumed or at least one credit has been consumed by pressing the second MAX input button. .

  If it is determined that the 1BET flag is ON (YES in step S1164), after 1.16 seconds have elapsed from the ON of the 1BET flag (step S1166), the second BET lamp 2010a is turned on (step S1168). Next, if it is determined that the 2BET flag is ON (YES in step S1170), 2.1 seconds after the ON of the 2BET flag (step S1172), the second BET lamp 2010b is turned on (step S1174). . Here, the state in which the 2 BET flag is ON means that, as in the case where the 1 BET flag is ON, the condition for turning on the second BET lamp 2010 b by inserting a medal or pressing the BET button is satisfied. Is shown.

  When it is determined that the 3BET flag is ON (YES in step S1176), the second BET lamp 2010c is turned on after a lapse of 3.69 seconds (step S1178) from the ON of the 3BET flag (step S1180). Here, the state in which the 3BET flag is ON is the same as the case in which the 1BET flag and the 2BET flag are ON, and the condition for turning on the second BET lamp 2010c by inserting a medal or pressing the BET button is satisfied. To indicate that

  If it is determined in step S1162 that the 1 BET lamp is lit (YES in step S1162), it is determined whether the 2 BET lamp is lit (step S1182). If it is determined that the 2BET lamp is not turned on (NO in step S1182), the process proceeds to step S1170. If it is determined that the 2BET lamp is on (YES in step S1182), the flow advances to step S1176.

  By performing the effect determination processing in steps S1162 to S1182, the BET lamp is turned on immediately when the player presses, for example, the MAX input button (the first MAX input button 206 or the second MAX input button). In particular, the second BET lamp 2010a, the second BET lamp 2010b, and the second BET lamp 2010c are turned on with a time difference. The time difference between the BET lamps may be changed depending on the game state and the degree of expectation. In addition, by giving the freeze state for several seconds to several minutes after the second BET lamp 2010c is turned on and then turning on the effect lamp 2020, it is possible to perform an effect that gives the player more expectation. It is the effect control board 510 that turns on the effect lamp 2020.

  By the way, as described above, it is the main substrate 409 that turns on the second BET lamp in the slow BET pattern (turns on 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET with a time difference). Although the information transmission from the main board 409 to the effect control board 510 is performed, but the information transmission from the effect control board 510 to the main board 409 is not performed, how much time difference the second BET lamp is turned on is determined. , A table stored in the main board 409.

  Unlike the effect control board 510, the main board 409 cannot hold many effect patterns due to the capacity, but holds several effect modes. Therefore, when the winning information is a hit or when the number of ART games is 100 games or more, the winning (the player has won an advantageous condition for the player) is appealed so as to appeal. The time difference between the lighting of the two BET lamps may be made large (the one with a larger time difference may be selected from several effect mode tables).

  For example, in the second MAX insertion button effect determination process, the setting is such that the 3BET lamp is turned on 3.9 seconds after the 3BET flag is turned on, but these seconds are fixed as described above. is not. In this way, by turning on the lamp with a considerably larger time difference than turning on in the gaseous second MAX insertion button effect judging process described later, it is possible to obtain a benefit that is advantageous to the player by using the BET lamp. You can appeal.

  Also, in a game in which a privilege that is advantageous to the player is obtained, unlike the case of an effect (Gaseslow BET effect) in the gaseous second MAX insertion button effect determination process described later, the second BET lamp is relatively turned on. A table having such a large time difference may be easily selected. Thereby, the slower the second BET lamp is turned on, the more the player can have a sense of expectation (that he has won an advantageous privilege).

  Note that these series of effects are appropriately referred to as slow bet effects. In this slow BET effect, after the number of bets is set by inserting medals (using stored medals), control is performed to freeze the BET lamp until lighting and delay the lighting, and to insert medals (using stored medals). Even if there is, control to delay the setting of the number of bets may be considered.

  Here, the slow BET effect will be described using a time chart. FIG. 70 is an example of a time chart in a case where a pressing operation of the second MAX input button 2000 is performed and a slow BET effect is performed. When the second MAX input button 2000 is pressed in the game in which it is determined that the slow BET effect is to be performed, the 1 BET input command, the 2 BET input command, and the 3 BET input command are transmitted from the standby at the same time as the second MAX input button 2000 is pressed. State. After a lapse of 1.16 seconds from the transmission of the 1BET insertion command (step S1166 in FIG. 67, see (1) in FIG. 70), the 1BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010a) is turned on.

  Next, after 2.1 seconds have elapsed since the transmission of the 2BET insertion command (step S1172 in FIG. 67, see (2) in FIG. 70), the 2BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010b) is turned on. Then, after a lapse of 3.69 seconds from the transmission of the 3BET insertion command (step S1176 in FIG. 67 and (3) in FIG. 70), the 3BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010c) is turned on. The time (freeze time) until the 3BET lamp is turned on is set longer than the 1BET lamp and the 2BET lamp. In particular, in the case where the number of ART games is 100 games or more, it is possible to give the player an interest such that the longer the freeze time is, the more expected it is.

  Explaining the above aspect in another expression, in a game in which it is determined that a slow BET effect is to be performed, when the second MAX insertion button 2000 is pressed, the time when the 1 BET insertion command is transmitted is set as a starting point, The time until the 1 BET lamp is turned on (see (1) in FIG. 70) is measured, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (after 1.16 seconds in this embodiment), the 1 BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010a) is turned on. Light. Then, a 2BET insertion command is transmitted after the 1BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010a) is turned on, and the time from when the 2BET insertion command is in the transmission state until the 2BET lamp is turned on (see FIG. 70). (See (2)), and after a certain period of time (after 2.1 seconds in this embodiment), the 2BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010b) is turned on.

  Further, a time period from when the 2BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010b) is turned on to when the 3BET insertion command is transmitted, and when the 3BET insertion command is in the transmission state, is a starting point, and the time until the 3BET lamp is turned on (see FIG. 70). (Refer to (3))), and the 3BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010c) is turned on after a lapse of a predetermined time (after a lapse of 3.69 seconds in this embodiment). It is to be noted that the timer mounted on the CPU 1110 of the main board 510 measures the time from the transmission of the input command to the lighting of the lamp as described above.

  From a player's point of view, it is possible to visually recognize that the lamps (second BET lamps 2010a to 2010c) are not turned on immediately after the second MAX input button 2000 is pressed, but are turned on with a delay. it can.

  The freeze time from 1 BET lamp to 3 BET lamp lighting can be changed, and as described above, the higher the expectation, the longer the freeze time can be set. Furthermore, by combining with the effect performed by the effect control board 510 such as turning on the effect lamp 2020, it is possible to perform more various effects.

[Gase 2nd MAX button production effect determination process]
The gaseous second MAX input button effect determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the medal insertion betting number setting process that the gaseous second MAX insertion button effect determination process is to be performed (step S1074, step S1090), the 1 BET lamp is set in the gaseous second MAX insertion button effect determination process. It is determined whether it is lit (step S1192). If the one-bet lamp is not turned on (NO in step S1192), it is determined whether the one-bet flag is on (step S1194). If it is determined that the 1BET flag is ON (YES in step S1194), the second BET lamp 2010a is turned on after a lapse of 1.16 seconds (step S1196) from the ON of the 1BET flag (step S1198).

  Next, when it is determined that the 2BET flag is ON (YES in step S1200), the second BET lamp 2010b is turned on 2.1 seconds after the 2BET flag is turned ON (step S1202) (step S1204). If it is determined that the 3BET flag is ON (YES in step S1206), the second BET lamp 2010c is turned on after a lapse of 3.69 seconds from the ON of the 3BET flag (step S1208) (step S1210).

  If it is determined in step S1192 that the 1 BET lamp is lit (YES in step S1192), it is determined whether the 2BET lamp is lit (step S1222). If it is determined that the 2BET lamp is not turned on (NO in step S1222), the process proceeds to step S1200. If it is determined that the 2BET lamp is on (YES in step S1222), the process advances to step S1206.

  By performing the effect determination processing in steps S1192 to S1222, the BET lamp is immediately turned on when the player presses, for example, the MAX input button (the first MAX input button 206 or the second MAX input button). In particular, the second BET lamp 2010a, the second BET lamp 2010b, and the second BET lamp 2010c emit F light with a delay from the normal mode.

  Although the second MAX input button effect determination process is the same as the case of the second MAX input button effect determination process, when the second MAX input button effect determination process is performed, the game state is actually expected by the player. It is in a state in which it can be held (for example, the number of additional games in the ART game is 100 or more). On the other hand, when the gaseous second MAX insertion button effect determination process is performed, it is not in a state where the player can expect. Therefore, even if the BET lamp is turned on in the slow BET mode, the effect is merely a gaseous effect.

[First MAX input button effect determination process]
The first MAX input button effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. When it is determined in the medal insertion betting number setting processing that the first MAX insertion button effect determination processing is performed (steps S1076 and S1092), the 1 BET lamp is turned on in the first MAX insertion button effect determination processing. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S1232). If the one-bet lamp is not lit (NO in step S1232), it is determined whether the one-bet flag is on (step S1234). If it is determined that the 1BET flag is ON (YES in step S1234), the first BET lamp 614a is turned on 0.25 seconds after the 1BET flag is turned on (step S1236) (step S1238).

  Next, when it is determined that the 2BET flag is ON (YES in step S1240), the first BET lamp 614b is turned on 0.25 seconds after the ON of the 2BET flag (step S1242) (step S1244). If it is determined that the 3BET flag is ON (YES in step S1246), the first BET lamp 614c is turned on 0.25 seconds after the 3BET flag is turned on (step S1248) (step S1250).

  If it is determined in step S1232 that the 1 BET lamp is lit (YES in step S1232), it is determined whether the 2 BET lamp is lit (step S1252). If it is determined that the 2BET lamp is not turned on (NO in step S1252), the process proceeds to step S1240. If it is determined that the 2BET lamp is turned on (YES in step S1252), the flow advances to step S1246.

  The effect determination processing in steps S1232 to S1252 is performed in the same manner as in the mode in which no effect using the BET lamp is performed in the game operation normally performed in the conventional slot machine 1. That is, since the game is not a slow BET pattern or a gasslow BET pattern, the credit is consumed (medal insertion) regardless of whether the first MAX insertion button 206 or the second MAX insertion button is pressed. Almost simultaneously, the BET lamps (614a to 614c) are sequentially turned on.

  By the way, a case where a credit is less than three in a three-slot slot machine will be described. For example, if the number of credits is less than three, that is, two, the MAX input button (including both the first MAX input button 206 and the second MAX input button 2000) is turned on, and the MAX input button is pressed. Even if it does, only the credit of the storage is consumed, and it is not possible to play. However, since one or two credits have been consumed by pressing the MAX insertion button, a slow BET effect is performed as described below, and one medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot. By throwing it into the 203, the remaining slow BET effects are performed.

[Slow BET production when credit is insufficient]
In a three-bet slot machine, normally, even when the number of stored credits is insufficient (for example, when the number of credits is 1 or 2), the button is turned on so that the MAX input button can be pressed. Prompts the player to press the MAX input button. When the player presses the MAX input button in response to the prompt, only the stored credits (for example, 1 and 2) are consumed, but the game cannot be started. In other words, the game cannot be started unless medals for the shortage are inserted. In the present embodiment, a situation arises in which a production cannot be performed because the number of BETs is insufficient in a game for which a slow BET is to be produced.

  In such a case, how to control when a slow BET effect is performed will be described below. First, the MAX input button 206 may be a conventional button as described above, but it is preferable that the MAX input button 206 can be pressed only when three credits are stored. For example, in the situation where only one credit is stored, the MAX input button 206 is not pressed so that the button can be pressed, and the MAX input lamp is pressed only after the remaining two credits are input. It is possible to make the operation effective.

  In this case, it is preferable to control so that the BET lamp is not turned on when the medal is inserted. However, there is no problem in performing the slow BET effect using the second BET lamp 2010. In other words, the first BET lamp 614 may simply be turned on in synchronization with the digestion of credits and the insertion of medals. However, when performing a slow BET effect, the first BET lamp 614 is stored by using the second BET lamp. Even when the credits are not sufficient for performing the slow BET effect, the player can enjoy the slow BET effect. However, when the third medal is inserted, the number of bets is determined, so that at least the lighting of the first BET lamp 614c needs to be synchronized with the lighting timing of the second BET lamp 2010c. is there.

  Even when a conventional MAX input button is used, control can be performed as follows. For example, a case where only one credit has been stored will be described with reference to the flow of the second MAX input button effect determination processing in FIG. 67.

  Even if only one credit is stored, if the button is a conventional MAX input button, the player is prompted to perform an operation such as illuminating the button so that the button is pressed. Here, when the player presses the MAX insertion button, one stored credit is consumed. Thereby, the state is set to “1 BET flag ON” in the second MAX insertion button effect determination process (YES in step S1162).

  Then, after 1.16 seconds have elapsed since the 1BET flag was turned on (step S1164), the second BET lamp 2010a is turned on as the 1BET lamp (step S1166). At this time, the first BET lamp 614a may be similarly turned on, but may be turned on at the same time as one credit is consumed (there is no need to have a correlation with the lighting effect of the second BET lamp). ). Preferably, the timing is synchronized with the lighting timing of the second BET lamp 2010a.

  However, in step 1168, since no credit or medal has been inserted, the flow cannot be advanced (NO in step S1168). In such a case, the "2 BET flag ON" can be cleared by inserting a medal (YES in step S1168). After 2.1 seconds have elapsed since the 2BET flag was turned on (step S1170), the second BET lamp 2010b is turned on as a 2BET lamp (step S1172).

  At this time, the first BET lamp 614b may be turned on similarly, but may be turned on at the same time as one credit is consumed (there is no need to have a correlation with the lighting effect of the second BET lamp). ). Preferably, the timing is synchronized with the lighting timing of the second BET lamp 2010b.

  The same applies to the case where the third medal is inserted. By inserting the third medal, the "3BET flag is turned on" (YES in step S1174). After 3.69 seconds have passed since the 3BET flag was turned on (step S1176), the second BET lamp 2010c is turned on as a 3BET lamp (step S1178). At this time, the first BET lamp 614c may be turned on due to the lighting of the second BET lamp 2010c, but the lighting timing needs to be synchronized with the second BET lamp 2010c.

  This is because any one of the second BET lamp 2010c and the first BET lamp 614c is turned on because a game can be started (the starting lever 210 can be operated). When the lighting timing of the first BET lamp 614c and the lighting timing of the second BET lamp 2010c are not synchronized, the game is started when either the first BET lamp 614c or the second BET lamp 2010c is turned on. In other words, the purpose of performing the slow BET effect is dismissed.

  Thus, even if the MAX BUTTON button is pressed and the slow BET pattern effect is not performed due to the credit being less than the specified number, the slow BET effect can be achieved by inserting the medal later. It is possible to restart.

  Here, the proper use of the first MAX input button and the first BET lamp and the use of the second MAX input button and the first BET lamp will be described. When credits are stored and no instruction or suggestion is made on the image display body 500 (for example, an instruction such as “press the second MAX input button!”), The player inputs the first MAX. Normally, a button is pressed. When the player presses the first MAX insertion button 206, the stored credits are inserted (in the present embodiment, three credits are applied, and if three or more credits are stored, three credits are stored). Sheets are inserted).

  When three credits are inserted, the first BET lamps 614a and 614b are turned on in conjunction with the consumption of the credits (and the number of bets is set) (the first BET lamp 614c is set to the second MBET). It must be synchronized with the lighting of the lamp 2010c). Here, in the game one game before the game, when it is determined that the game performs the slow BET effect, the player presses the first MAX input button 206 as described above, and Even after the credit has been consumed and the first BET lamps 614a, 614b have been turned on, a slow BET effect can be performed using the second MBET lamps 2010a, 2010b, and 2010c. In addition, in order to make the player have more impact, it is possible to turn on the effect lamp only in special cases or to cause the effect character 2030 to appear.

  That is, even if the player does not press down the second MAX input button 2000 and consumes the credit, the player can experience the slow BET effect. At this time, the lighting of the second BET lamp 2010c must be synchronized with the lighting of the first BET lamp 614c. The reason that the second BET lamp 2010c or the first BET lamp 614c is turned on is that the process of setting the number of bets is completed and the game can be started (lever ON).

  However, if the pressing operation of the second MAX input button 2000 is performed after the pressing operation of the first MAX input button 206 is performed first, the pressing operation of the second MAX input button 2000 is invalidated. When the pressing operation of the first MAX input button 206 is performed after the pressing operation of the MAX input button 2000, the pressing operation of the first MAX input button 206 is invalidated.

  In addition, a state suggesting that a pressing operation of the second MAX input button 2000 is performed (for example, a state in which a display “press the second MAX input button!” Is displayed on the image display body 500; When it is determined that the slow BET effect is to be performed), it is preferable to perform control so that the operation is invalidated even if a medal return button 208 (hereinafter, referred to as a settlement button 208) is pressed. Button 208 may be enabled. The slow BET effect when the settlement button 208 is operated will be described later.

  Here, the slow BET effect when the credit is insufficient is described with reference to a time chart. FIG. 71 is an example of a time chart in a case where the pressing operation of the second MAX insertion button 2000 is performed, but the stored medals (credits) are 0 and medals have to be maintained. In the game in which it is determined that the slow BET effect is to be performed, the player inserts a medal when the credit is insufficient.

  When one medal is inserted, a 1BET insertion command changes from a standby state to a transmission state. Then, after 1.16 seconds have elapsed since the transmission of the 1BET insertion command (step S1166 in FIG. 67, see (1) in FIG. 71), the 1BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010a) is turned on. If the second medal is not inserted as it is, the effect of the 2BET lamp is not performed. At this point, if the settlement button 208 is pressed, one medal is settled.

  When the second medal is inserted, the 2BET insertion command changes from standby to transmission. After a lapse of 2.1 seconds from the transmission of the 2BET insertion command (step S1172 in FIG. 67, see (2) in FIG. 71), the 2BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010b) is turned on. Also in this case, if the third medal is not inserted, the effect of the 3BET lamp is not performed. Also, at this point, if the settlement button 208 is pressed, two medals are settled.

  When the third medal is inserted, the 3BET insertion command changes from the standby state to the transmission state. Then, after a lapse of 3.69 seconds from the transmission of the 3BET insertion command (step S1176 in FIG. 67 and (3) in FIG. 71), the 3BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010c) is turned on. When the settlement button 208 is pressed at this point, three medals are settled.

  According to the time chart of FIG. 71, even if the stored medals (credits) are insufficient, it is possible to perform a slow BET effect by inserting medals, and thus each lamp is turned on immediately after inserting medals. You can have expectations depending on whether or not. As a result, it is possible to play a game while expecting each game even in an operation that generally has little change, such as insertion of a medal.

  FIG. 72 is another example of a time chart example in a case where the operation of pressing the second MAX insertion button 2000 is performed, but the stored medals (credits) are 0 and medals have to be maintained. That is, this is a time chart when the start trigger of the slow BET effect is based on the lighting of each BET lamp.

  Specifically, when one medal is inserted, a 1-BET insertion command changes from a standby state to a transmission state. Then, after a lapse of 1.16 seconds from the transmission of the 1BET insertion command (step S1166 in FIG. 67, see (1) in FIG. 72), the 1BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010a) is turned on. The process up to this point is the same as (1) in FIG.

  When the 1BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010a) is turned on, the freeze time of the 2BET lamp is started (see (2) in FIG. 72). When a game medal is inserted within the freeze time, the 2BET insertion command changes from the standby state to the transmission state. Then, the 2BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010b) is turned on when the freeze time of the 2BET lamp ends.

  When the 2BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010b) is turned on, the freeze time of the 3BET lamp is started (see (3) in FIG. 72). When a game medal is inserted within the freeze time, the 3BET insertion command changes from the standby state to the transmission state. Then, at the end of the freeze time of the 3BET lamp, the 3BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010c) is turned on.

  In the slot machine shown in the time chart of FIG. 72, the count up to the lighting of the second BET lamp 2010b is counted from the lighting of the second BET lamp 2010a, and as shown in FIG. Therefore, if the time from the insertion of the first medal to the insertion of the second medal is long (e.g., 2.1 seconds or more have elapsed since the second BET lamp 2010a was turned on), the time after the insertion of the second medal is longer. Without this, the bet amount is set, and depending on the lighting timing of the second BET lamp 2010b, it may be difficult to know whether or not a slow BET effect has been performed.

  Similarly, if the time from the insertion of the second medal to the insertion of the third medal is long (3.69 seconds or more have elapsed since the lighting of the second BET lamp 2010b), the time after the insertion of the third medal Without this, the bet amount is set, and depending on the lighting timing of the second BET lamp 2010c, it may be difficult to know whether or not a slow BET effect has been performed. However, to put it another way, it can be said that whether or not to show the slow BET effect can be controlled by the timing of the medal insertion of the player.

[Slow BET effect when the payment button is operated]
For example, even after the first MAX input button 206 or the second MAX input button 2000 is pressed and the slow BET effect is performed, the medal and the credit are settled by pressing the settlement button 208. When a medal is inserted again after the settlement, the slow BET effect may be performed again. However, if the slow BET production is performed again after the slow BET production has been settled and a medal is inserted again, the game may be unnecessarily delayed. It is better not to perform a slow BET effect (when a medal is inserted again after settlement).

  If a slow BET effect is to be performed in the above case, it is preferable that the slow BET effect be performed in a shorter time than the total time of the previously performed slow BET effect. This is also because repetition of the settlement and the insertion of medals may cause a game delay unnecessarily.

  The above describes the settlement action after a slow BET effect has already been performed by inserting three medals or digesting three stored medals in a three-slot slot machine. Is also assumed in the following cases.

  Although the slow BET effect is performed even when only one medal is inserted, a 3 BET lamp can be used to more emphasize a game state advantageous to the player (for example, to suggest the winning of the ART game). It can be said that this is the time when (the first BET lamp 614c or the second BET lamp 2010c) is turned on (or thereafter). This is because the third BET lamp (second BET lamp 2010c) is filled with a staging accessory 2030, which is opened when the third BET lamp is turned on and becomes visible to the player. This is because it is possible to perform an effect that excites the user. That is, at the stage where one or two medals are inserted, it is hard to say that the slow BET effect in this embodiment has been completely performed.

  Accordingly, in a situation where one or two medals are inserted (or one or two medals are consumed), even if the slow BET effect up to the second BET is performed, the slow BET effect of the third BET is performed. It has not been done. In such a situation, if medals are inserted again (assuming that three medals are inserted) after the settlement button 208 is operated, the slow BET effect up to the second BET has already been performed. Alternatively, a slow BET effect for 1-3 BET may be performed again.

  However, if the slow BET effect for the first 2 BETs has already been performed before the settlement operation, and if it is assumed that the slow BET effect for 1 to 3 BETs will be performed again, it is thought that it will unnecessarily delay the game Does not perform the slow BET effect for the already inserted one (or two), but only performs the slow BET effect for the third one when the third medal is inserted. good.

[Normal game or ART game processing]
The normal game or ART game processing S700 will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal game or ART game processing, the “normal game” indicates a game state other than the privilege game. More strictly, it indicates that the gaming state is mainly general. In the flow of the normal game or ART game processing, when it is determined that the game is not in the ART mode (YES in step S702), it is determined whether the game is a normal game, that is, in the general game mode (step S702). S704). If it is determined that the game is being played (YES in step S704), an ART lottery is performed (step A706).

  The ART lottery is performed (step S706). When the ART lottery is won (YES in step S708), 40 is set to the ART counter (step S710), and the ART game is performed for 40 games. If the ART lottery has not been won (NO in step S708), it is determined whether the number of chance zone precursor games is greater than 0 (step S712). Here, the chance zone refers to a state in which the winning probability of the replay time (RT) is the same as in the ordinary game, and is controlled to a gaming state in which it is easy to win the ART drawing. In this chance zone, since it is in a state where it is easy to win the ART lottery, it is sometimes expressed as high accuracy.

  In addition, the precursor game is a continuous effect that is not a chance zone but can be expected to shift to the chance zone. It is preferable that the number of games to be continued is at most about 16 games.

  If the chance zone predictive game number is greater than zero (YES in step S712), for example, assuming that the chance zone predictive game number is 4, 1 is subtracted from the chance zone predictive game number (4) (step S716). When it is determined that the number of chance zone precursor games is zero (YES in step S716), 10 is set in the chance zone counter (step S718), and 10 games in the chance zone are played. In the above example, 1 is subtracted from the chance zone predictive game number (4) in step S716 to become 3, so the chance zone predictive game number is not zero (NO in step S716), and the normal game or the ART game The processing flow ends.

  When the chance zone predictive game number is less than zero (NO in step S712), it is determined whether the chance zone counter is greater than zero (step S720). This is to determine whether the game is in the chance zone. If the chance zone counter is greater than zero (YES in step S720), that is, if the game is in the chance zone, 1 is subtracted from the chance zone counter (step S722), and ART drawing in the chance zone is performed. (Step S724).

  The chance zone ART drawing indicates that the game is to be drawn during the chance zone (including the end of the chance zone). If the ART lottery is won during the chance zone, the ART game will be played during the chance zone or at the end of the chance zone. If the player wins the ART drawing at the chance zone (YES in step S726), the slow BET pattern is set on the main board 409 (step S730). This indicates that the second BET lamp 2010a, the second BET lamp 2010b, and the second BET lamp 2010c are turned on in a slow BET pattern when the MAX insertion button is operated in the next game.

  The slow BET pattern is set (step S730), and 40 is set in the ART counter (step S732). If it is determined that there is no winning in the ART drawing at the chance zone (NO in step S726), a gasslow BET drawing is performed (step S734). When the gasslow BET drawing is executed (YES in step S736), the gasslow BET pattern is set on the main board 409 (step S738).

  By the way, if you win the Gasslow BET lottery, the game (the next game) in the chance zone or after the end of the game in the chance zone, when the MAX input button is operated, even if you have not won the ART , The second BET lamp 2010a, the second BET lamp 2010b, and the second BET lamp 2010c are turned on in a slow BET pattern.

  If the chance zone counter is equal to or less than zero (0) in step S720 (NO in step S720), a general medium chance zone drawing is performed (step S740). The general medium chance zone drawing is a drawing for determining whether or not to win the chance zone when the game state is the general game state. When the general medium chance zone lottery is won (step S742), a chance zone precursor game number lottery is performed (step S744). When the chance zone precursor game number is determined in step S744, the chance zone precursor game number is set (S746).

  In the normal game or ART game processing S700, when it is determined that the game is in the ART (NO in step S702), the process proceeds to A (FIG. 64). When the process proceeds to A, additional lottery of the number of ART games is performed during the ART (step S752). In step S752, the number of ART games added is extracted, and if it is determined that the number of additional games in the ART is 100 or more (YES in step S754), a slow BET pattern is set on the main board 409 (step S754). S756).

  If it is determined that the number of additional games during the ART is 100 games or less (NO in step S754), a gasslow BET drawing is performed (step S758). When the gasslow BET drawing is executed (YES in step S760), the gasslow BET pattern is set on the main board 409 (step S762).

  As described above, during the general game, during the chance zone, and during the ART, the lottery in a state of giving the player expectation, for example, the ART lottery, the additional lottery of the ART game, the chance zone lottery, the chance zone former game number lottery is performed. Done. The display mode of the BET lamp can be changed by operating the MAX input button in the next game depending on whether or not the winning has occurred. As a result, the player can operate the MAX input button with expectation each time the button is operated.

  Assuming that the player can operate the MAX input button while expecting each time the button is operated, the following effects can be obtained. In other words, the game can be advanced with expectation for each game.

[Internal lottery process, reel control process]
Hereinafter, a specific process of the internal lottery process of step S200 and the reel control process of step S300 will be described.

(Internal lottery process)
FIG. 73 specifically shows the internal lottery process in step S200 executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 and the like).

  In the internal lottery process, it is determined whether or not the start lever 210 has been operated on the assumption that the BET process has been performed (step S202), and if it is determined that the start lever 210 has been operated (YES in step S202). Then, a start lever monitoring termination process is performed (step S203). The start lever monitoring end process will be described later. After the start lever monitoring end processing is performed, the main lottery is performed (step S204). This lottery is a lottery performed with reference to FIG. 50 as described above. Then, when one of the winning combinations is won in the main lottery, referring to FIG. 51, the condition apparatus that is established corresponding to the winning combination is set (step S206).

  When the processing in step S206 is completed, it is determined whether or not the number N of precursor games described later is 1 or more (step S208). The judgment game number N is determined to be 1 or more in step S208 if the pseudo game execution lottery has been won in the previous game and the pseudo game number lottery has been won and the pseudo game has not been played yet. is there. Even in the case where the precursor game ends in the previous game and the pseudo game is played in the current game, since the subtraction process of the precursor game number N is performed in step S326 described later, the precursor game number N is 1 in the determination in step S208. It is determined that the above is the case (N = 1). If it is determined in step S208 that the precursor game number N is 1 or more (YES in step S208), the internal lottery process ends.

  On the other hand, when the pseudo game loop lottery in step S3428 described later is won, and in a normal case where it is not determined that the pseudo game is to be executed yet, in step S208, the precursor game number N is not 1 or more, that is, 0. It is determined that there is (NO in step S208).

  If it is determined in step S208 that the number N of precursor games is not one or more (NO in step S208), it is determined whether or not the pseudo game flag is off (step S210). When the pseudo game loop lottery in step S3428 described later is won, it is determined that the pseudo game flag is ON (NO in step S210), and the process proceeds to step S222. If it is not yet determined that the pseudo game is to be executed, it is determined that the pseudo game flag is off (YES in step S210).

  If the pseudo game flag is off in step S210, a pseudo game execution lottery in step S212 is performed. The pseudo game execution lottery performed in step S212 is performed with reference to the pseudo game execution lottery table of FIG. That is, despite the fact that information communication from the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 to the main board 409 is not performed, the above-described privilege game type determination process in step S500 allows the main board 409 to The pseudo game execution lottery can be performed based on the results determined by the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520.

  In step S214, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game execution lottery is won. If the pseudo game execution lottery is won (YES in step S214), it is determined that the pseudo game is to be executed, and the pseudo game flag is determined. Is turned on (= 1) (step S216). If the false game execution lottery is lost (NO in step S214), the processing such as the pseudo lottery is not executed, and the internal lottery processing ends.

  When the pseudo game flag (= 1) is turned on in step S216, a precursor game number lottery is performed with reference to the precursor game number lottery table of FIG. 75 (step S218). The number of predictive games is the number of games required from when it is determined that the pseudo game is to be executed to when the pseudo game is started. In the precursor game before the start of the pseudo game, an effect is given on the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520 to give the player an expectation that the pseudo game will be executed.

In step S220, the result of the sign game lottery is set as the sign game number N (step S220). In this embodiment, if the number N of the precursor games is determined to be one of 1 to 3 as a result of the lottery of the precursor game, the winning is determined, and if the number N of the precursor games is determined to be 0, the winning is lost. (Losing). Regarding such a precursor game number lottery in step S218, the above-described privilege game type determination processing in step S500 is performed even though information communication from the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 to the main board 409 is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform on the main board 409 side based on the result determined by the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520.

  In step S222, a pseudo lottery is performed with reference to the pseudo lottery table of FIG. Also in this pseudo lottery, despite the fact that information communication from the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 to the main board 409 is not performed, the above-described privilege game type determination processing in step S500 is performed. This can be performed on the side based on the result determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520.

  When the pseudo lottery in step S222 is performed, a pseudo condition device that is established corresponding to the winning pseudo combination is set with reference to FIG. 77 (step S224). FIG. 77 is a table showing each of the winning pseudo-combinations in the pseudo game and pseudo-condition devices that are established corresponding to the respective winning pseudo-combinations.

[Start lever monitoring end processing]
The start lever monitoring end process will be described. In the three-seat exclusive machine, three medals are inserted or credits are inserted, and the number of bets is set (or the number of bets is set, but it is determined that the number of bets is set) Since the grace period (frozen state) until the notification to the user ends, the start lever 210 can be operated as the lottery process. Therefore, when it is determined that the start lever has been operated in the internal lottery process (step YES in S202), it is not necessary to manage the operation of the starting lever 210 for the purpose of skipping the slow BET effect. Therefore, the monitoring of the start lever ends (step S203).

(Reel control processing)
FIG. 78 specifically shows the reel control processing of step S300 executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 and the like).

  In the reel control process, first, it is determined whether or not the forced freeze flag is on (= 1) (step S302). If the forced freeze flag is on (= 1) (YES in step S302), a forced freeze effect on the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is performed (step S310). When the forced freeze effect in step S310 ends, the forced freeze flag is turned off (= 0) (step S320). The forced freeze effect is an effect in which the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is stopped at the specific reel behavior set in step S6130. In the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the forced freeze flag is off (= 0) (normal time), it is difficult for the player to distinguish between execution and non-execution of the forced freeze effect. ) And when the forced freeze flag is on (= 1) (at a specific time), the behavior of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is similar to the extent that the player cannot grasp the behavior. The condition under which the forced freeze flag is turned on (= 1) will be described later. The “similar behavior” indicates, for example, a) that the rotation speed is apparently the same, b) the rotation start timing is apparently the same, and c) the operation of the stop buttons 211a to 211c is effective. All or at least one of (a) to (b), in which the lighting timing and the lighting mode of the lamps are the same in appearance, corresponds to the same mode.

  In step S322, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game flag is on (= 1) (step S322). The pseudo game flag is in the ON state when the pseudo game execution lottery in step S212 is won. If the pseudo game flag is on (= 1) (YES in step S322), it is determined whether or not the number N of precursor games is 1 or more (step S324). If the number N of precursor games is 1 or more (YES in step S324), one game is subtracted from the number N of precursor games (step S326), and it is determined whether or not the number N of precursor games is zero. (Step S328). If it is determined in step S328 that the number N of precursor games is 0 (YES in step S328), it is determined that the precursor game has ended, and a freeze-on operation is performed to enable execution of the pseudo game in this game. (= 1) is performed (step S330). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S324 that the number N of precursor games is not equal to or greater than 1 (NO in step S324), the process skips steps S326 and S328, proceeds to step S330, and freezes on (= 1). In addition, in the case where the precursor game number N is determined to be 0 in the precursor game number lottery in step S218 (when the result of the precursor game number lottery is lost), or when the pseudo game loop lottery in step S3428 described later is won, In step S324, it is determined that the number N of precursor games is not one or more.

  When freeze-on is performed in step S330, the process proceeds to step S340, and a pseudo game process is performed (step S340). When freeze-on (= 1) is performed in step S330, a pseudo game process in step S340 is performed. Then, when the pseudo game processing in step S340 ends, the process proceeds to step S350, and the game processing is performed. If the pseudo game flag is turned off in step S322 (NO in step S322), the pseudo game is not performed in the current game, and thus the processing in steps S324 to S340 is skipped, and the processing in step S350 is skipped. Proceed to game processing. Also, if it is determined in step S328 that the number N of precursor games is not 0 (NO in step S328), the pseudo game is not performed in the current game, so that the processing in step S330 and step S340 is skipped, and The process proceeds to the main game process of S350.

[Pseudo game processing]
FIG. 79 is an example of a flowchart specifically showing the pseudo game process of step S340 executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 and the like).

  The pseudo game process of step S340 is a process performed on the assumption that the freeze-on (= 1) has been performed in step S330, and the main lottery of step S204 and the pseudo lottery of step S222 based on the operation of the starting lever 210 have already been performed. The game is started and one game is not finished yet.

In the pseudo game process, first, the result command of the pseudo game symbol determination process is reset (step S3402). Next, rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started (step S3404). In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a certain time has elapsed after the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c has started so that the player cannot easily distinguish the pseudo game from the main game. The same processing is performed in the pseudo game processing and the main game processing as to the rotation state at the speed and the light emission mode when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are activated.

  When the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started in step S3404, the effective time during which the stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is enabled is set (step S3406), and the reel stop button is set. The stop operation of 211a, 211b, 211c is validated (step S3408). Then, it is determined whether or not the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c have been stopped within the valid time set in the processing in step S3406 (step S3420). If it is determined that the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c have been stopped within the valid time (YES in step S3410), the process proceeds to step S3414, where a pseudo game reel swinging process is performed (step S3414). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3410 that the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c have not been stopped within the valid time (NO in step S3410), whether the valid time set in the processing in step S3406 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it is (step S3412). If the effective time has not elapsed (NO in step S3412), the process returns to step S3410, and if the effective time has elapsed (YES in step S3412), the process proceeds to step S3414 to perform the pseudo game reel swinging process. (Step S3414). That is, if the stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is not performed within the valid time, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are automatically stopped. Details of the pseudo game reel swing process will be described later.

  When the swing processing is performed on all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c as a result of performing the pseudo game reel swing processing in step S3414, the stop button valid time set in step S3406 is reset (step S3416). Then, the process proceeds to step S3418, and a pseudo game symbol determination process is performed (step S3418). This pseudo game symbol determination process is a process of determining a combination of symbols displayed on the activated lines in the pseudo game process. Then, the result information of the pseudo game symbol determination processing in step S3418 is command-set so that a command can be transmitted to the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520 (step S3420), and the pseudo condition device is reset (step S3422). . As described above, although not shown, the command set information is transmitted from the main board 409 to the effect control board 510 (or the effect control board 520) each time.

  In step S3420, the command information is set so that the result information of the pseudo game symbol determination processing can be transmitted to the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520. However, the command is set in step S222 and step S3440 described later. A command may be set so that the result of the pseudo lottery, that is, the pseudo condition device information set in step S224 or step S3442 described later, can be transmitted to the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520.

  In step S3424, an in-game continuation lottery is performed. This in-game continuation lottery is performed without proceeding to the next game (that is, without performing medal insertion or insertion button operation) and determining whether or not to perform the pseudo game again before shifting to the main game in the current game. This is performed based on the in-game continuous lottery / pseudo game loop lottery table of FIG. In the in-game continuation lottery in step S3424, the above-described privilege game type determination process is performed by performing the above-described privilege game type determination process even though information communication from the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 to the main board 409 is not performed. On the main board 409 side, it is possible to carry out based on the result determined by the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520.

  In step S3426, it is determined whether or not the in-game continuous lottery performed in step S3424 has been won. If it is determined that the in-game continuation lottery has been won (YES in step S3426), a start lever operation waiting state is determined in which it is determined whether start lever 210 has been operated (step S3438). If it is determined in step S3438 that starting lever 210 has been operated (YES in step S3438), a process similar to the process in step S222, that is, a pseudo lottery is performed with reference to the pseudo lottery table of FIG. 76 ( Step S3440). Then, when the pseudo lottery in step S3440 is won, as in the process of step S224, referring to FIG. 77, a pseudo condition device established corresponding to the winning pseudo combination is set (step S3442), and the process returns to step S3404. Thus, the pseudo game is repeated again in one game without inserting medals.

  In the above-described pseudo lottery in step S3440, processing similar to the processing in step S222 (that is, pseudo lottery with reference to the pseudo lottery table in FIG. 77) is performed. The greater the number of pseudo games performed in (i.e., the greater the number of wins in the in-game continuous lottery), the higher the degree of advantage for the player may be. The increase in the degree of advantage for the player means that, for example, the probability of winning the winning pseudo-role (logo) having the highest expected value of the average number of additions in the additional lottery performed on the effect control board 520 side is increased, An example is that the probability of winning the winning pseudo combination having the highest probability of winning the additional lottery is increased. As described above, by giving the tendency that the degree of advantage to the player increases as the pseudo game continues in one game (the tendency of the internal lottery probability to gradually increase), the present game and the In combination with the configuration in which it is difficult to recognize the pseudo game, when the stop game is started after the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started again after the pseudo game ends, the above-described swing fluctuation appears (the pseudo game is not executed). It is possible to provide a novel slot machine that raises the tension of whether or not the game is being performed again.

  If it is determined in step S3426 that the in-game continuous lottery has been lost (NO in step S3426), the pseudo game loop lottery is performed with reference to the in-game continuous lottery / pseudo game loop lottery table in FIG. 80 ( Step S3428). This pseudo game loop lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to continue the pseudo game in the next game that is performed by inserting medals, although the pseudo game in one game has ended.

In step S3430, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game loop lottery performed in step S3428 has been won (step S3430). If it is determined that the pseudo game loop lottery has been lost (NO in step S3430), the pseudo game flag is turned off (= 0) (step S3432), and it is determined whether or not starting lever 210 has been operated. Then, the state becomes a waiting state of the start lever operation (step S3434). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3430 that the pseudo game loop lottery has been won (YES in step S3430), the process of step S3432 is skipped, and the flow advances to step S3434. That is, when it is determined in step S3430 that the pseudo game loop lottery has been won (YES in step S3430), the process proceeds to step S3434 with the pseudo game flag kept on. If it is determined in step S3434 that start lever 210 has been operated (YES in step S3434), the freeze is released (step S3436), and the pseudo game process ends.

[Pseudo game reel swing processing]
Here, the pseudo game swing process of step S3414 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game reel swing processing executed by the main board 409. Note that FIG. 81 shows the contents of the reel stop processing by the “table method” as an example.

  In the pseudo game reel swinging process, first, in step S34142, a pseudo game reel stop control table is selected in accordance with the pseudo condition device operated in accordance with the result of the pseudo lottery (see step S222) in the current game. In this pseudo game reel stop control table, patterns corresponding to all the pseudo condition devices on a one-to-one basis are prepared in advance, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

  In the above-described step S34142, when the pseudo game reel stop control table is selected based on the established pseudo condition device, the standby state is set until the pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is received. (Step S34144, Step S34160, Step S34176). In these standby states, it is determined whether each of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c has already stopped and the swinging process has been performed, or the first reel stop flag has not been set to ON (F = 0). (I.e., OFF state), and also determines whether any of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c has been pressed. Until the pressing operation of all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted, the determination in step S34192 is not satisfied, and the processing in step S34144 and thereafter is repeated.

  Here, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are received (stop operation procedure) is referred to as a stop operation procedure called “forward push”, “reverse push”, and “middle push”. ).

  The above-mentioned “forward push” stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the left reel 301a first (that is, a procedure for pressing the left reel stop button 211a first), and a second procedure. According to the operation order of the reels to be stopped after the third, the operation is further divided into two stop operation procedures of [left reel → middle reel → right reel] or [left reel → right reel → middle reel]. These two are collectively called "forward push". In this specification, the former stop operation procedure may be simply referred to as “forward push”, and the latter stop operation procedure may be particularly referred to as “scissor push”.

  The “reverse push” stop operation procedure is an operation procedure for stopping the right reel 301c first (as opposed to “forward push”) (that is, a procedure for pressing the right reel stop button 211c first). The operation sequence of the reels to be stopped after the second one is further divided into two stop operation procedures of [right reel → middle reel → left reel] or [right reel → left reel → middle reel] Divided. These two are collectively called "reverse push". In this specification, the former stop operation procedure may be simply referred to as “reverse push”, and the latter stop operation procedure may be particularly referred to as “reverse scissor push”.

  The above-mentioned “middle press” stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the middle reel 301b first (ie, a procedure for first pressing the middle reel stop button 211b), and a second procedure. The operation sequence of the reels to be stopped thereafter is further divided into two stop operation procedures of [middle reel → left reel → right reel] or [middle reel → right reel → left reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “middle press”. In this specification, the former stop operation procedure may be simply referred to as “middle push”, and the latter stop operation procedure may be particularly referred to as “middle reverse push”.

  In step S34144, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has stopped (the left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0), and whether a pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been received. I do. If it is determined in step S34142 that the left reel stop button 211a is pressed first (first) along the stop operation procedure of “forward push” from the standby state of the press operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, step S34144. Are satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S34146.

  In step S34146, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). Here, the “first reel” refers to a reel for which a first stop operation is accepted or a first stop. In this example (“forward push”), since the stop operation of the left reel 301a is received first, the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). Therefore, the determination at Step S34146 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S34148.

  In the next step S34148, a first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In the first reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning dummy combination symbol corresponding to the winning dummy combination is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating pseudo condition device.

  In step S34152, a reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, the effective lines of the slot machine 1 are only two lines, the upward line and the downward line. At this point, the stop control tables of the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) are reduced to one. Can be determined. In other words, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is referred to as a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), particularly the symbol at the upper position or the lower position is the winning pseudo combination symbol. If the symbol is a possible symbol, a reel stop control table capable of aligning the corresponding winning pseudo-combination symbols of the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) on the pay line based on the symbol is set. Will choose.

  In step S34154, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the flow moves to the next step S34156.

  In step S34154, the left reel stop flag LF is turned ON (LF = 1), and the flow shifts to step S34158.

  In step S34158, a left reel swinging process for reciprocatingly rotating or vibrating the once stopped left reel 301a in a small range in the forward direction and the reverse direction is performed. Note that the left reel 301a is temporarily stopped from the rotating state, and the swing processing is performed immediately thereafter.

  Then, in a step S34192, it is determined whether or not all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are in the swing processing state. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF is still ON, and the swinging process has only been performed. Since the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating, this determination is not satisfied, and the flow proceeds to step S34144. Repeat the process after returning.

  Then, when the processing after step S34144 is executed again, the determination in step S34144 is not satisfied because the left reel 301a is already in the swing processing state, and the flow shifts to step S34160.

  In step S34160, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b has stopped (the middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF = 0), and whether a pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b has been received. I do. Here, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward push”. Therefore, the determination at Step S34160 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S34162.

  In step S34162, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S34146. Since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1) at this point, this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S34166.

  In step S34166, as the middle reel stop process, based on the reel control table corresponding to the running pseudo condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S34152 above), the stop position of the corresponding winning pseudo combination symbol is determined. Execute the control of. Then, at this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the reel to be stopped second (second reel), steps S34164, S34168, and S34170 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S34172, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned ON (MF = The process moves to step S34174 as 1).

  In step S34174, a middle reel swinging process is performed in which the temporarily stopped middle reel 301b is reciprocally rotated or vibrated in a small range in the forward and reverse directions. The middle reel 301b is temporarily stopped from the rotating state, and the swing processing is performed immediately thereafter. At this time, it is synchronized with the swing of the left reel 301a.

  Then, in step S34192 again, only the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in the swing processing state, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and not in the swing processing state. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied and step S34144 is performed. And the subsequent processes are repeated.

  Further, in the processing after step S34142 for the third time, it is first determined whether or not the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) in step S34176 and a pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is received. In other words, the subsequent steps S34178, S34182, and the like are the same as the above-described steps S34160 and subsequent steps (step S34162, step S34166), and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  Then, in a step S34188, the right reel stop flag RF is turned ON (MF = 1), and the flow shifts to a step S34190.

  In step S34190, right reel swing processing is performed to reciprocate or rotate the once stopped right reel 301c in a small range in the forward and reverse directions. Note that the right reel 301b is temporarily stopped from the rotating state, and the swing processing is performed immediately thereafter. At this time, it is synchronized with the swing of the right reel 301a and the center reel 301b.

  Finally, in step S34192, since at this time all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are in the swing processing state, this determination is satisfied, and the pseudo game reel swing processing ends.

  In the "reverse push" stop operation procedure, if only the right reel 301c is in the swinging processing state and any of the winning pseudo-combination symbols is located at the lower position of the stopped eyes of the right reel 301c, two valid still symbols are still present. It is possible to match the winning pseudo-combination symbols to any of the lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S34184, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning pseudo-symbol symbols on any of the activated lines may be prepared, and one of the reel stop control tables may be selected.

  Regarding the reel stop control in the case of the “forward push” and “middle push” stop operation procedures, as in the case of the “reverse push” stop operation procedure, when only the first reel is stopped, A plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols may be prepared for the line, and one of the reel stop control tables may be selected. In this manner, six types of reel stop control of “forward push”, “scissor push”, “reverse push”, “reverse scissors push”, “middle push” and “middle reverse push” can be realized. In the pseudo game, the reel stop control is performed, and once the reel is stopped within 500 msec, the reel swing processing is performed.

[Main game processing]
FIG. 82 specifically shows the game processing of step S350 executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 and the like).

  In the main game process in step S350, the operation of the starting lever 210 (YES in step S202), the main lottery in step S204 based on the operation of the starting lever 210, and the pseudo lottery in step S222 have already been performed, and one game has been completed. Not started under. Note that one game does not end unless this game is played, and one game ends when this game ends.

  In the present game process, first, rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started (step S3502). As described above, the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c in the main game process is the same as the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c in the pseudo game process so that the player hardly distinguishes the main game process from the pseudo game process. Then, when a certain time has elapsed since the start of the rotation, the motor rotates at a constant speed.

  When the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started in step S3502, the stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is enabled (step S3504), and the game reel stop processing is performed (step S3504). S3506). The details of this game reel stop processing will be described later. Also, in the present game processing, the automatic stop of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is not performed unlike the pseudo game processing, so that the setting of the effective time as in the processing of step S3406 is not performed.

When all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped as a result of the main game reel stop processing of step S3506, the process proceeds to step S3508, where the main game symbol determination processing is performed (step S3508). This game symbol determination process is a process of determining a combination of symbols displayed on the activated lines in the main game process, and will be described later in detail. When the present game symbol determination process is completed, a payout process of the game medium (medal or credit data) is performed based on the result of the present game symbol determination process of Step S3508 (Step S3510), and the condition set in Step S206 is performed. The device is reset (step S3512).

  In step S3514, it is determined whether or not the result of the present game symbol determination process (step S3508), that is, the symbol combination displayed on the activated line is a symbol combination corresponding to the replay 3 (step S3514). Here, when it is determined that the symbol combination displayed on the activated line is the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 3 (YES in step S3514), it is determined whether or not the chance RT is being performed (step S3516). . Here, if it is determined that the chance RT is being performed (YES in step S3516), it is determined whether the bell counter is 4 or not (step S3518). Here, if the bell counter is determined to be 4 (YES in step S3518), a reel effect lottery is performed according to the type of the bonus game estimated in the bonus game type determination processing in step S500 (step). S3520).

  Here, the reel effect lottery in step S3520 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is an example of a table used in the reel effect lottery in step S3520 performed according to the type of the bonus game estimated in the bonus game type determination process in step S500.

  The reel effect performed in step S3520 is performed when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 3 is displayed on the activated line while the chance RT is being performed and the bell counter is 4 (that is, a replay that triggers the start of the privilege game). This is performed when the symbol combination corresponding to the game 3 is displayed on the activated line), and after the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 3 is displayed on the activated line, the frozen state is set and the start lever 210 is operated. This is an effect performed by starting the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c without any change. As a reel effect pattern performed at this time, patterns 1 to 24 are prepared as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 83, which of the patterns 1 to 24 is used to determine the reel effect is determined according to the type of the bonus game estimated in the bonus game type determination processing in step S500. Is done.

  As can be seen from FIG. 83, in the patterns 1 to 24, not only the reel effect mode but also the freeze time (that is, the time during which the reel effect is performed) and whether the forced freeze determined in step S6128 is turned on. No or not is associated.

  Patterns 1 to 8 are not determined when the bonus game estimated in the bonus game type determination processing in step S500 is red (short red, normal red, super red), and is blue. (Short blue, normal blue, super blue) and a pattern determined only in the case of premium. Therefore, when the symbol combination “white seven-white seven-white seven” is displayed at the middle position in the symbol display window 401 as a result of the reel effect, the type of the bonus game started from the next game Can inform the player that it is a blue or premium privilege game. As can be understood from FIG. 74, the probability of winning in the execution lottery of the pseudo game is set higher in the blue or premium privilege game than in the red privilege game. As can be seen from FIG. 76, the blue-based or premium privilege game has a higher rare degree than the red-type bonus game. Cherry 2, logo) is set with a high probability of winning. As will be described later, the winning pseudo combination with a high rare degree is set such that the expected addition of the bonus game is more advantageous to the player than the winning pseudo combination with a low rare degree.

  Patterns 9 to 16 are blue-based (short blue, normal blue, and normal blue) when the bonus game estimated in the bonus game type determination processing in step S500 is red (short red, normal red, super red). This is a pattern that is determined with a much higher probability than in the case of (super blue).

  The patterns 17 to 24 are not determined when the bonus game estimated in the bonus game type determination processing in step S500 is short red, normal red, short blue, and normal blue, and is not determined. This pattern is determined only when the colors are red, super blue, and premium. As can be seen from FIG. 60, the super red and super blue privilege games have a larger number of games executed as privilege games than the short red, normal red, short blue and normal blue privilege games. In the premium privilege game, the number of games executed as the privilege game is the smallest, but the probability of winning the execution lottery of the pseudo game is the highest (see FIG. 71), and the winning pseudo role (logo) with the highest degree of rareness ) Is extremely high, and is a privilege game with the highest degree of advantage for the player.

  As described above, in the reel effect lottery in step S3520, if any of patterns 1 to 8 is determined and the reel effect in step S3522 is performed in any of the determined patterns 1 to 8, From the next game, the player can know that the blue or premium privilege game in which both the probability of winning the execution lottery of the pseudo game and the expected addition of the privilege game are more advantageous to the player is started.

  However, as can be seen with reference to FIG. 83, the patterns 9 to 16 are the same in reel presentation mode as the patterns 17 to 24, respectively. Therefore, when any of the patterns 17 to 24 is determined in the reel effect lottery of step S3520, and the reel effect of step S3522 is performed in any of the determined patterns 17 to 24, such a case is performed. It is difficult for the player to know which privilege game is started from the next game only by watching the reel effect. Thereby, even if a symbol combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” is displayed at the middle position in the symbol display window 401 as a result of the reel effect, it is possible to reduce discouragement given to the player. .

  Returning to FIG. 82, after the reel effect in step S3424 is performed, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern determined by the reel effect lottery in step S3520 is any of the patterns 17 to 24 (see FIG. 82). Step S3524). If it is determined that the effect pattern determined by the reel effect lottery is any of patterns 17 to 24 (YES in step S3524), the forced freeze flag is turned on (= 1) (step S3526). When the forced freeze flag is turned on in step S3526, as can be seen from step S6130 in FIG. 61, in the first game in which the privilege game is started, the reel 301a is set in the specific reel behavior described in step S6130. The rotation and stop of the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409. As described in step S6130, the specific reel behavior is such that “white seven-white seven-white seven” is displayed at the middle position in the symbol display window 401 after each reel 301a, 301b, 301c makes two turns in the forced flag state. This is a behavior in which a symbol combination is displayed. Therefore, if the reel effect is performed in any one of the patterns 17 to 24 in step S3522, it is possible to determine which one of the privilege games to be started from the next game by just watching the reel effect. Although it is difficult for the player to grasp, in the first game in which the privilege game is started, when the forced flag is turned on and a reel effect with a specific reel behavior is performed, the effect determined in the reel effect lottery in step S3520. The player can recognize that the pattern is the pattern 17 to the pattern 24 (that is, the privilege game to be started is any one of super red, super blue, and premium).

  If it is determined in step S3524 that the effect pattern determined by the reel effect lottery is not any of patterns 17 to 24 (NO in step S3524), the game process ends without turning on the forced freeze flag. I do.

  In addition, in step S3514, step S3516, and step S3518, when any one is determined as NO, the reel effect lottery in step S3520, the reel effect in step S3522, and the forced freeze flag on in step S3526 are skipped. Then, the present game processing ends. That is, only when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 3 is displayed during the chance RT and the bell counter is 4, the process proceeds to the reel effect lottery process of step S3520. In other words, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 3 is displayed during the chance RT, if the bell counter is not 4, the main game process ends without proceeding to the reel effect lottery process in step S3520. Only when it is determined in step S3518 that the bell counter is 4, the process of proceeding to the reel effect lottery in step S3520 may be a chance RT during the bonus game or during the execution of the game type determination process in step S500. However, the bell counter is not 4. That is, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the chance RT and the replay 3 is displayed during the bonus game or during the execution of the game type determination process in step S500, if the bell counter is not 4, the next game is executed. Since the bonus game is not started, the present game process is ended without proceeding to the reel effect lottery process of step S3520.

  Although not shown, if the start lever 210 in step S202 is operated after the BET processing has been performed, whether the wait timer started in the previous game has timed out (for example, 4.1 seconds has elapsed). It is determined whether or not. The timer called a wait timer is a time (for example, 4.1) from when the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c starts in the current game to when the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c starts in the next game. Second). Here, when the time of the wait timer expires (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started. The determination as to whether or not the time of the wait timer has expired loops until the time of the wait timer expires. That is, the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c does not start until the time of the wait timer expires.

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start of step S3434 which is a trigger for starting the main game after the end of the pseudo game so that the player cannot easily distinguish the pseudo game from the main game. Even when the lever 210 is operated, the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is not immediately started. Specifically, when the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started as a pseudo game (that is, the rotation of the reels in step S3404 is started), timing of the pseudo wait timer is started. Then, the pseudo wait timer measures the lapse of time (for example, 4.1 seconds) until the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started as the main game (that is, until the start of reel rotation in step S3502). Here, when the pseudo wait timer times out (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started as the processing of step S3502. The determination as to whether or not the pseudo wait timer has timed out loops until the pseudo wait timer times out. That is, the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c does not start until the time of the pseudo wait timer expires. Thus, the time from when the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started in the pseudo game to when the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started in the pseudo game under the operation of the starting lever 210 is performed. Is the same as the time from the start of rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c in the current game to the start of rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c in the next game, or the same in appearance, This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish the pseudo game from the main game.

  However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the in-game continuous lottery in step S3424 is won, the pseudo game is played again in one game. In this case (when the in-game continuation lottery is won), the counting by the pseudo weight timer is reset, and when the starting lever 210 in step S3438 is operated, the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is immediately performed based on the operation. It is started (step S3404). Thus, as long as the winning in the in-game continuation lottery in step S3424 is continued, the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started immediately each time the start lever 210 is performed in step S3438 (step S3404). However, it is possible to create a super speed game period in which a plurality of pseudo games can be played at a high speed. Moreover, it is possible to provide a novel game in which a bonus game, which will be described later, is added based on the result of the pseudo game in the super-speed game period.

  Note that both the wait timer and the pseudo wait timer are provided in the main board 409, and the management of time measurement is performed by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409.

[This game reel stop processing]
Next, the main game reel stop processing in step S3506 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the main game reel stop processing executed by the main board 409. FIG. 84 shows the contents of the reel stop processing by the “table method” as an example.

  In the present game reel stop processing, first, in step S35062, the present game reel stop control table is selected according to the present condition device that has been operated in accordance with the result of the current main lottery (see step S204). In the main game reel stop control table, patterns corresponding to all main condition devices on a one-to-one basis are prepared in advance, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

  When the present game reel stop control table is selected based on the present condition device established in step S35062 described above, the standby state is established until a press operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is received. (Step S35064, Step S35080, Step S35094). In these standby states, it is determined whether each of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c is already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF). State), and it is also determined whether any of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c has been pressed. Until the pressing operations of all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are accepted, the determination in step S35078 is not satisfied, and the processing in step S35064 and thereafter is repeated.

  The stop operation procedures referred to as “forward push”, “reverse push”, and “middle push” are as already described in the pseudo game reel swing process.

  In step S35064, it is determined whether the flag (left reel stop flag LF) indicating that the left reel 301a has stopped is OFF (LF = 0), and whether a pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been received. I do. If it is determined in step S35064 that the left reel stop button 211a has been pressed first (first) from the standby state of the press operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c along the stop operation procedure of "forward push", step S35064 Is satisfied (YES in step S35064), and the routine goes to step S35066.

  In step S35066, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). In this example (“forward push”), since the stop operation of the left reel 301a is received first, the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). Therefore, the determination at Step S35066 is satisfied (YES at Step S35066), and the routine goes to the next Step S35068.

  In the next step S35068, a first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In the first reel stop processing, the control of the stop position of the winning combination symbol corresponding to the winning combination is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition apparatus.

In step S35072, a reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, the effective lines of the slot machine 1 are only two lines, the upward line and the downward line. At this point, the stop control tables of the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) are reduced to one. Can be determined. That is, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is called a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), particularly the symbol at the upper position or the lower position can be the winning combination symbol. In the case of a symbol having a characteristic, a reel stop control table capable of aligning the winning combination symbols of the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) on the pay line based on the symbol is selected. Will be.

  In step S35074, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the flow shifts to the next step S35076.

  In step S35076, the left reel stop flag LF is turned ON (LF = 1), and the flow shifts to step S35078.

  In the present game reel stop process, the swing process is not performed even if each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is stopped, as in the pseudo game reel swing process.

  Then, in a step S35078, it is determined whether or not all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are in a stopped state. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF is still ON and the stop processing is only performed. Since the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating, this determination is not satisfied (step S35078). NO), the process returns to step S35064, and the subsequent processes are repeatedly executed.

  Then, when the processing after step S35064 is executed again, the determination in step S35064 is not satisfied (NO in step S35064) because the left reel 301a is already in the swinging state, and the flow shifts to step S35080.

  In step S35080, it is determined whether the flag (middle reel stop flag MF) indicating that the middle reel 301b has been stopped is OFF (MF = 0), and whether a pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b has been received. (Step S35080). Here, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward push”. Therefore, the determination at Step S35080 is satisfied (YES at Step S35080), and the routine goes to the next Step S35082.

  In step S35082, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S35066 (step S35082). If the left reel 301a has stopped, the first reel stop flag has already been turned ON (F = 1) at this point, so that the determination in step S35082 is not satisfied (NO in step S35082), and the flow proceeds to step S35086. Move on.

  In step S35086, as the middle reel stop processing, the stop position of the corresponding winning pseudo-combination symbol is determined based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition apparatus (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S35062). Execute the control of. Then, at this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the reel to be stopped second (second reel), steps S35084, S35088, and S35090 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S35092, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned on (MF = 1). The process moves to step S35078.

  Then, in step S35078 again, only the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in the stopped state, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and not in the stopped state. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the flow returns to step S35064. Then, the subsequent processes are repeatedly executed.

  Further, in the processing after step S35064 for the third time, it is first determined whether or not the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) in step S35094 and a pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is received. In other words, the subsequent steps S35096, S35100, and the like are the same as the above-described steps S35064 and later (steps S35084, S35086), and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  Then, in step S35106, the right reel stop flag RF is turned ON (MF = 1), and the flow shifts to step S35078.

  Finally, in step S35078, since all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are in the stopped state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the present game reel stop processing ends.

  In the “reverse push” stop operation procedure, if only the right reel 301c is in the stop state and any of the winning combination symbols is present at the lower position among the stops of the right reel 301c, two pay lines are still in effect. In any case, it is possible to arrange the corresponding winning combination symbols. Therefore, at the stage of step S35094, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning pseudo-combination symbols on any of the activated lines may be prepared, and one of the reel stop control tables may be selected.

  Regarding the reel stop control in the case of the “forward push” and “middle push” stop operation procedures, as in the case of the “reverse push” stop operation procedure, when only the first reel is stopped, A plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols may be prepared for the line, and one of the reel stop control tables may be selected. In this manner, six types of reel stop control of “forward push”, “scissor push”, “reverse push”, “reverse scissors push”, “middle push” and “middle reverse push” can be realized.

[Reel stop control]
In the reel stop processing described above, reel stop control is performed to draw a winning combination symbol (corresponding winning combination symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible (so-called pull-in control). Specifically, when a reel stop operation by the player is received, a range in which the symbol can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (a range in which the corresponding winning symbol can be drawn in, for example, four symbols) ) Is determined in advance, and if there is a corresponding winning combination symbol in the range, the control is drawn into the symbol display window 401 to stop the reels. Here, the “pullable range” refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the reel rotation direction from the time when the reel stop operation is received until the reel stops. Say. For example, if the retrievable range is set to a maximum of four symbols, when a stop operation of the reel is received, the reel can be further rotated and moved up to four symbols starting from the position.

  Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even when there is no corresponding winning combination in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is received, the corresponding winning combination is within a range where the winning combination can be drawn. If there is, it is possible to move the corresponding winning combination symbol into the symbol display window 401 and then stop it. In addition, by performing the pull-in control, even if the timing of pressing the corresponding winning symbol is somewhat earlier, if the winning symbol is within the retrievable range, the player displays the winning symbol. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of a miss (the game privilege cannot be obtained and the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination cannot be acquired and the game privilege disappears).

  In the slot machine 1, when the condition devices corresponding to the normal replay combination, the ALL combination, and the like are operating, the winning combination symbols can always be arranged without the need for the player. This is because, for the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to each of the normal replay combination, the ALL combination, etc., the corresponding winning combination symbols are arranged at intervals of a maximum of four symbols. 47).

  When attention is further paid to the replay symbols, up to four other symbols are arranged on the left reel 301a between the replay symbols and the replay symbols (see FIG. 47). Thus, no matter where the stop operation is received on the left reel 301a, as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay combination is operating, the left reel 301a always draws the replay symbol to any of the activated lines and stops. be able to.

  On the other hand, as can be seen from FIG. 47, the “red seven” design, the “blue seven” design, the “white seven” design, the “BAR design”, the “cherry” design, the “watermelon” design and the “correct” design are: The reels are not arranged within the range where the pull-in control of the reels can be executed. Therefore, even if the symbols are displayed in the internal lottery (the main lottery or the pseudo lottery), the reels are stopped at an appropriate timing. These symbols are not displayed unless the buttons 211a to 211c are stopped. The symbol combination corresponding to the chance shown in FIG. 53 is not displayed unless the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are stopped at an appropriate timing. Note that these symbols (designs that are not displayed unless the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are stopped at appropriate timing) are called missing symbols.

  Also, when the result of the internal lottery is a duplication of the bonus combination and the small combination, the small combination is drawn in preferentially over the bonus symbol. If the winning combination of the bonus role and the small role is won, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the small role is displayed in the won game, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role is displayed in the next game and thereafter. It is.

  The above is an example of the reel stop processing by the table method. Apart from this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but a known process is also applicable to this process, so a specific description is omitted here. In the present embodiment, either the control method or the table method may be performed to stop the reels, and which method may be adopted may be determined as appropriate when constructing the control program.

[This game symbol judgment processing]
When the game reel stop process is completed, as a process performed by the main board 409, the winning combination symbols are aligned on any one of the activated lines in the symbol display window 401 (the symbol corresponding to any one of the winning combinations is displayed). This game symbol determination processing for determining whether or not the combination mode is displayed) is performed. In FIG. 85, the contents of the present game symbol determination processing will be specifically described.

  When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop processing, whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines is determined from the mode of the stop eyes in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning combination). It is determined whether or not a combination of symbols to be displayed is displayed). In addition, especially when all the reels are in the stop state, the stop may be referred to as a roll.

  In steps S35082 and S35084, it is determined whether the game is in the RB game or the BB game, respectively. This is to determine the ON state (= 1) and the OFF state (= 0) of the game state flags called the RB game flag and the BB game flag.

If the RB game in progress flag is ON (= 1), the determination at Step S35082 is satisfied (YES at Step S35082), and the routine goes to Step S35112. If the BB game flag is ON (= 1), the determination at Step S35084 is satisfied (YES at Step S35084), and the routine goes to Step S35104.

  If both the RB game flag and the BB game flag are OFF (= 0), neither of the determinations in S35082 and S35084 is satisfied (NO in both S35082 and S35084), and the routine goes to S35086.

  In step S35086, it is determined whether the BB symbols are aligned. If the BB symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines (“red seven-red seven-red seven”), this determination is satisfied (YES in step S35086), and the flow advances to the next step S35088. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S35086 that the BB symbols are not aligned on the pay line (NO in step S35086), the process proceeds to step S35090.

  In step S35088, a BB game start process is executed. Here, as the BB game, a process for performing a plurality of games in which medals can be easily obtained in a concentrated manner is performed (details will be described later). After the BB game start process in step S35088 is executed, the process moves to step S35122.

  In step S35090, it is determined whether the RB symbols are complete. When the RB symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines (“blue seven-red seven-red seven”), this determination is satisfied (YES in step S35090), and the routine goes to the next step S35092. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S35090 that the RB symbols are not aligned on the activated line (NO in step S35090), the process proceeds to step S35094.

  In step S35092, an RB game start process is executed. Here, as the RB game, a process for performing a plurality of games in which medals similar to the BB game are easily obtained in a concentrated manner is performed (details will be described later). After the execution of the RB game start process in step S35092, the process moves to step S35122.

  In step S35094, it is determined whether the replay symbols are complete. If the replay symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines (“repbell-replay-replay”), this determination is satisfied (YES in step S35094), and the flow advances to the next step S35096. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S35094 that the replay symbols have not been aligned on the activated line (NO in step S35094), the flow shifts to step S35098.

  In step S35096, a replay game process is executed. In the replay game process, a MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same bet number (MAX bet in this example) as the bet number in the game. Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay.

  In step S35098, it is determined whether or not the small symbol designs are complete (whether or not the combination of the small symbol symbols is displayed on the activated line). When the combination mode of the small symbol design is displayed on any one of the activated lines (YES in step S35098), the combination mode of the small symbol design displayed on the activated line as a prize as a result of performing one game. Are paid out (step S35100). Then, control goes to the next step S35122.

  If none of the winning combination symbols are aligned on the active line, none of the above determinations in steps S35086, S35090, S35094, and S35098 is satisfied (NO in step S35098), and the flow shifts to step S35102. Note that the roll at this time is also referred to as “losing eye (combination mode of disjointed patterns)”.

  In step S35102, a losing process is performed. In this losing process, if the winning flag that is ON (= 1) at this time is any other winning flag except BB and RB, the winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). If none of the winning flags are ON (= 1) (the loss flag is ON (= 1) at this time), the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0). After the loss process of step S35102 is performed, the process moves to step S35122.

  The processing from step S35084 to step S35102 is processing executed in the case of the general state, the normal RT, and the chance RT. Next, processing after step S35104 will be described. This process is a process executed in the case of the BB game (BB1 game, BB2 game) and the RB game (RB1 game, RB2 game).

  In step S35104, it is determined whether payout symbols in the BB game are complete (whether the combination of payout symbols is displayed on the active line). When the combination of payout symbols is displayed on any of the activated lines (YES in step S35104), the combination of payout symbols displayed on the activated line is determined as a prize as a result of performing one game. Are paid out in accordance with the number of medals or credit data (step S35106). After that, it moves to step S35108.

  In step S35108, a BB game end determination process is performed. In this BB game end determination processing, the BB game continues until the total number of payouts in the BB game exceeds a specified number, and when the total number of payouts in the BB game exceeds a specified number (for example, 250), the BB game ends. . During the BB game, it is determined whether or not the payout symbols in the BB game are aligned, and if the payout symbols in the BB game are aligned, a medal as a prize is paid out. Here, "BB game payout combination" is a general term for the ALL combination and the bonus game exclusive combination. When the BB game ends, the process moves to step S35112. When the BB game ends, the gaming state shifts to the general state.

  In step S35112, it is determined whether or not the payout symbols in the RB game are complete (whether or not the combination of payout symbols is displayed on the active line). When the combination of payout symbols is displayed on any of the activated lines (YES in step S35112), the combination of payout symbols displayed on the activated line is regarded as a prize as a result of performing one game. Are paid out according to the number (step S35114). After that, it moves to step S35116.

  In step S35116, an RB game end determination process is performed. In this RB game end determination processing, the RB game continues until the total number of payouts in the RB game exceeds a specified number (for example, 20), and the RB game is ended when the total number of payouts in the RB game exceeds the specified number. . During the RB game, it is determined whether or not the payout symbols in the RB game are aligned, and if the payout symbols in the RB game are aligned, a medal as a prize is paid out. The “payout during RB game” here is a generic name of the winning combinations that are paid out during the RB game, similarly to the payout during the BB game described above, and is the same as the “payout during BB game” in the present embodiment. It is. When the RB game is over, the process moves to step S35122. When the RB game ends, the gaming state shifts to the general state.

  In step S35122, a command is set so that the result information of the present game symbol determination process can be transmitted to the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520. However, instead of this, a command may be set so that the result of the main lottery in step S204, that is, the condition apparatus information set in step S206 can be transmitted to the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 as a command. .

  As described above, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is aligned on the activated line in the main game symbol determination process (step S3508) in the main game process, the game bonus of the gaming privilege corresponding to the selected combination is determined. A medal payout process based on the content is executed (a specified number of medals are paid out from the medal discharge device 110). Then, the payout number of medals is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). As a result, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that the specified number of medals corresponding to the small combination have been paid out.

  On the other hand, in the pseudo game symbol determination process in the pseudo game process, although the result information of the pseudo game symbol determination process (or the result information of the pseudo lottery) may be transmitted to the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520, Even if it is determined that the corresponding symbol combinations are aligned on the activated line, as the processing on the main board 409 side, the processing for giving the privilege to the player including the payout processing of the medals is not performed.

  In this respect, the present game and the pseudo game are greatly different. As described above, the main lottery is a lottery performed with reference to FIG. 50, and if any of the winning combinations is won in the main lottery, the condition apparatus that is established corresponding to the relevant winning combination is set (step S10). S206). On the other hand, the pseudo lottery is a lottery performed with reference to FIG. 76. When one of the winning pseudo roles is won in the pseudo lottery, a pseudo condition device established corresponding to the selected pseudo role is set. (Step S224).

  That is, in both the main lottery in the main game and the pseudo lottery in the pseudo game, although the lottery tables used are different, they are common in that the role lottery using the lottery table is performed. In both the main game and the pseudo game, the common point is that the stop control of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is performed based on the established main condition apparatus and the pseudo condition apparatus. Nevertheless, in the present game processing, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is aligned on the activated line, a medal as a prize is paid out. When it is determined that the symbol combinations are aligned on the activated line, no medal as a prize is paid out. As described above, as the processing on the main board 409 side, a lottery using the lottery table (a lottery for selecting any of a plurality of winning combinations) is performed, and the reel is displayed so that the result of the lottery is displayed. Although the stop control of 301a, 301b, and 301c is performed in the present game process and the pseudo game process, there is a great difference in whether or not a medal as a prize is paid out. In addition, when both the pseudo game and the main game are performed, both of these games are performed within one game that is performed on the premise of the BET processing. Moreover, when the in-game continuation lottery in step S3424 is won, a plurality of pseudo games and one main game are executed in one game. Note that only the main game may be performed in one game, but only the pseudo game is not performed in one game.

[BB game start processing]
If the determination in step S35086 in FIG. 85 described above is satisfied (YES in step S35086), a BB game start process is executed as a process on the main board 409 side (step S35088). The BB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S350882, the BB game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the BB flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. Next, in step S350884, the total payout number count during the BB game is cleared. Thus, the accumulation of the total payout number is executed from the next game. Then, from the next game, the BB game is started with 3 bets (three bets) similar to the base game.

[BB game end determination processing]
Subsequently, the BB game end determination processing in step S35108 in FIG. 85 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S351082, in response to the medal payout in step S35106 in FIG. 85 described above, the payout number of the BB game is added to the total payout number in the BB game.

  Next, in step S351084, it is determined whether the total number of payouts exceeds 250 (150 in the case of BB2). If the determination in step S351084 is not satisfied (NO in step S351084), the flow shifts to step S351806 to display the total payout number during the BB game (displayed on payout number display LED 612 or the like. The total payout number is for display. An LED or the like may be provided separately and displayed on this). In addition, when the determination in step S351084 is satisfied (YES in step S351084), the flow proceeds to step S351888.

  In step S351088, the BB game in-progress flag is turned OFF (= 0), and the BB game end determination processing ends.

[RB game start processing]
When the determination at step S35090 in FIG. 85 is satisfied (YES at step S35090), the RB game start process is executed (step S35092). The RB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S350902, the RB game in progress flag is turned ON (= 1). Although not shown, the RB flag is turned off (= 0) at this time. Next, in step S608, the total payout number count during the RB game is cleared. Thus, the accumulation of the total payout number is executed from the next game. Then, from the next game, the RB game is started with 3 bets (three bets) similar to the base game.

[RB game end determination processing]
Next, the RB game end determination processing in step S35116 in FIG. 85 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S351162, in response to the payout of medals in step S35114 in FIG. 85, the payout number of the RB game is added to the total payout number in the RB game.

  Next, in step S351164, it is determined whether the total number of payouts has exceeded 20. If the determination in step S351164 is not satisfied (NO in step S351164), the flow shifts to step S351166 to display the total payout number during the RB game (displayed on payout number display LED 612 and the like. The total payout number is displayed. LED and the like may be separately provided and displayed on this).

  If the determination in step S654 is satisfied (YES in step S351164), the flow shifts to step S351168.

  In step S351168, the RB game in progress flag is set to OFF (= 0), and the RB game end determination processing ends.

[Control of production operation]
The above is an example of the control by the main board 409. In the slot machine 1, the control of various effect operations is executed by the effect control board 510 in accordance with the progress of the game. This is to perform bidirectional communication with the effect control board 520 based on various commands (information commands, output signals) output from the main board 409, and to execute them on the effect control board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118 and the like). . As described above, various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such an effect mode is stored in the ROM 1120 or the ROM 1140 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

  For example, the effect mode includes one that is completed only with the game (hereinafter, referred to as a single effect mode), one that is performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter, a continuous effect mode), and the like. Among these, the single-shot effect mode includes an effect indicating the winning flag (indicative effect, announcement effect, details will be described later), an effect notifying medal payout (pay appearance, and a mode in which the payout number may be notified). There is.

  The suggested effect is different from the effect (notification effect) in which the winning flag is directly notified to the player, and is an effect in which the winning flag is indirectly notified. For example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag is described. , Colors, etc. are displayed. The suggestion effect is also performed when there is no winning flag (that is, in the case of a loss). In this case, the effect is such that the content is hard to be noticed as a loss (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken with any winning combination). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the game has been lost.

  In the notification effect, for example, when the winning flag is BB, it is possible to clearly know which winning combination the player has won in the game, such as “Bonus determined!”. This effect is particularly effective when executed for a winning combination (since a large number of medals can be acquired) that is particularly pleasing to players, such as BB and RB. That is, when the player wins the BB or the like, it can be given a meaning to congratulate the player.

  Further, as a continuous effect mode, there is a mode corresponding to a game state such as a general state, a normal RT, a chance RT, and a bonus. These are intended to clarify the state of the game, and by performing these effects (continuous effects), the player has a chance to determine whether the current game state is, for example, normal RT. It is easy to make a distinction as to whether or not RT is in progress.

  Then, during the bonus game, from the start to the end, a continuous effect is executed so that the player can recognize the effect. For example, the number of medals or the number of remaining payouts paid out as a prize in each privilege game is displayed, and as the remaining number of payables approaches zero, a sound effect that gives a sense of crisis is generated. In this way, the player can proceed with the game while checking how long each bonus game lasts.

  In the bonus game, a continuous effect is executed, but the display of the number of medals paid out as a prize in the bonus game or the remaining payout number may not be performed. And, not displaying these, for example, if the player does not know the end condition of the bonus game, it has the effect of being able to continue the bonus game without knowing how long the bonus game will continue it can.

  The above-described effect form can be executed as displaying an image on the image display body 500, generating a sound effect using the speaker 512 or the like, emitting light or lighting using an LED decoration or the like. Such an effect mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression, for example, when the player has been playing the game for a long time. It should be noted that the effect mode is not limited to being executed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, and the like. For example, instead of the image display 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, a doll imitating a character, a movable model, etc., and a side reel (for example, arranged at a position different from each reel, and the start and stop thereof can be performed independently of the player's operation as part of the production) Or an illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light represented by a rotating lamp) to execute various effects. With such a method, it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[Additional lottery for bonus games]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the “rare small role” is won during the bonus game, the bonus game using the bonus game addition lottery table in FIG. A lottery will be held. As can be seen from FIG. 90, the additional lottery probability of the privilege game has a different degree of advantage for the player depending on the appearance of the rare small role and the setting of the slot machine 1. Such an additional lottery of the privilege game is performed when the result of the main lottery is a rare small part, and the result of the pseudo lottery in which the payout of medals is not performed is a rare small part. Sometimes also happens.

  Here, as can be seen from FIG. 50, the probability that the result of this lottery is a rare small combination is very low. On the other hand, as can be understood from FIG. 76, only the rare small role is prepared as the winning pseudo role in the pseudo game, and even during any privilege game, the rare probability is higher than the probability of loss. The probability of winning a small role is higher. Therefore, a rare small role that does not easily appear in the present game will appear with an extremely high probability in the pseudo game. In this way, by realizing the pseudo game, it is possible to raise the appearance rate of the rare small combination that is difficult to appear in the present game.

  In addition, although the pseudo game is a game that can be played without consuming game media such as medals, if a rare small role is won, an additional lottery is performed based on the bonus game, so that the It is possible to increase the chance of executing the lottery with the bonus game added while suppressing the consumption.

  In addition, the additional lottery of the privilege game may be performed when the rare minor role is won, or the symbol combination corresponding to the selected rare minor role is not sufficient just to win the rare minor role. It may be performed when it appears above.

  Further, when the condition device corresponding to “rare small combination” is set in the main lottery in the normal state (general state, corresponding to normal RT) (the condition device corresponding to “rare small combination” is set in step S306). (If set), it is preferable that the bonus lottery of the bonus game is performed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned additional lottery of the bonus game.

  The table used in the above-mentioned bonus game addition lottery uses a common bonus game addition lottery table (both in FIG. 90). The present invention is not limited to this, and another table may be used for the bonus game addition lottery table used in the present game and the bonus game addition lottery table used in the pseudo game.

  Note that when it is determined in step S311 that the bonus game is not being played, the pseudo game execution lottery in step S312 is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When it is determined in step S311 that the bonus game is not being played (that is, in the normal state). At some point), a pseudo game execution lottery may be performed. In this case, in addition to when the present condition device corresponding to “rare small win” is set in step S306, also when the pseudo condition device corresponding to “rare small win” is set in the pseudo lottery, the bonus game May be performed.

  In this way, if the pseudo game execution lottery is performed even in the normal state, and the provisional lottery of the privilege game is performed even when the pseudo condition device corresponding to the “rare small part” is set, It is preferable to change the ease of winning in the bonus lottery of the bonus game according to the state of the control boards 510 and 520. Even in the case where the pseudo game execution lottery is performed in the normal state, only the main lottery alone is always provided independently of the main lottery and the pseudo lottery, for example, when the pseudo game execution lottery is won. The pseudo lottery is executed only for.

[Game content]
The control by the main board 409 and the effect control board 510 has been described above. Next, the content of the game will be briefly described.

  When the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the BET processing has been performed, the internal lottery is performed by the main board 409 and the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started. Then, when the player operates the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped based on the internal lottery result and the operation mode (operation timing and operation order) of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. .

  In the effect control board 510, a bonus game lottery is performed each time the game is executed (each time the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the BET processing has been performed) (the effect control board 510 corresponds to a bonus game lottery executing means). Do). In this bonus game lottery, not only is it determined whether or not a bonus game is to be executed, but also which of the above seven types of bonus games is to be executed. When the bonus game lottery is won, the control of the pushing order navigation is executed as the processing of the effect control boards 510, 520. As long as the player stops operating the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in accordance with this push order navigation, the command is not transmitted from the effect control boards 510 and 520 to the main board 409, but the effect is determined by the effect control board 510. The type of the bonus game thus performed can be estimated by the main board 409 using the bell counter (it can be estimated by performing the above-described bonus game type determination processing). Note that even if the chance RT is not being performed at the time of starting the bonus game type determination process (for example, even if the normal RT is being performed), the navigation is performed in the push order so that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 2 is displayed. Therefore, as long as the player performs the stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in accordance with the pressing order navigation, the game is controlled to the chance RT.

  Then, when the start condition of the privilege game is satisfied (when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 3 is displayed when the chance RT is being performed and the bell counter is 4, the player operates the start lever 210). Without this, the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started, and the reel effect in step S3522 is executed. As a result of this reel effect, if a combination of "white seven" symbols is displayed in the middle row, it is determined that the blue or premium privilege game will be started from the next game, so the player Can be recognized.

  On the other hand, if the combination of the “BAR” symbols is displayed in the middle as a result of the reel effect in step S3522, it is recognized that the possibility that the bonus game started from the next game is a blue-based bonus game is low. can do. If the pattern of the reel effect performed at this time is any one of patterns 9 to 16, as shown in FIG. 83, there is a high possibility that the bonus game started from the next game is red. However, if the pattern of the reel effect performed at this time is any one of the patterns 17 to 24, the forced freezing state has already been obtained at the start of the next game (the first game in which the privilege game has started). The rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is stopped by the specific reel behavior described above, and it is determined that the game is any of the super red, super blue, and premium privilege games. Therefore, even if the combination of the “BAR” symbols is displayed in the middle as a result of the reel effect in step S3522, the player may be uplifted when starting the next game, rather than giving discouragement to the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the pattern performed in the reel effect of step S3522 is any one of the patterns 9 to 24, the behavior of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c in the next game is preferably the same. That is, depending on whether the pattern performed in the reel effect of step S3522 is any of patterns 9 to 16 and any of patterns 17 to 24, the player in the bonus game performed thereafter has Although the degree of advantage may vary greatly, it is difficult for the player to know which type of privilege game is about to be started from the behavior of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c in the first game of the privilege game. ing. This makes it possible to maintain the player's interest in the bonus game for a longer time.

  At this time, as the processing on the effect control boards 510 and 520, a symbol combination corresponding to the replay 3 which is a trigger of starting a bonus game is displayed on the activated line, and then a combination of “BAR” symbols is displayed in the middle. Then, an effect image indicating that the red-based privilege game is started is displayed in the display area of the image display body 500. After that, the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started based on the operation of the starting lever 210 by the player. However, at this point, the behavior of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is different between when the forced freeze flag is off (= 0) (normal time) and when the forced freeze flag is on (= 1) (specific time). The player can determine whether the pattern performed in the reel effect in step S3522 is any of patterns 9 to 16 or any of patterns 17 to 24. It is difficult to know which one was. Then, when the rotating reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped and a combination of “white seven” symbols is displayed in the middle (middle white sevens), the pattern performed in the reel effect of step S3522 is changed to the pattern 17 ~ Is determined to be one of the patterns 24 (that is, the forced freeze flag is ON), and the effect control boards 510, 520 are used to select one of the super red, super blue, and premium privilege games. The fact is displayed in the display area of the image display body 500. Thereafter, without the player operating the start lever 210, the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, which are displayed in a combination of "white seven" symbols in the middle, is started, and thereafter, the result of the present game is displayed. .

  On the other hand, after the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 3 which triggers the start of the bonus game is displayed on the activated line, the "BAR" symbol combination is displayed in the middle row to indicate that the red bonus game is to be started. After the image is displayed in the display area of the image display body 500, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c whose rotation has been started based on the operation of the start lever 210 by the player are symbols other than the above-mentioned middle white sevens. When displayed as a combination (including a lost symbol combination), the pattern performed in the reel effect in step S3522 was one of patterns 9 to 16 (that is, the forced freeze flag was off). ) Is determined. At this time, the displayed symbol combinations other than the displayed middle sevens indicate the result of the game.

  As described above, when the pattern performed in the reel effect in step S3522 is any one of the patterns 9 to 24, the combination of the “BAR” symbols is displayed in the middle row, and the red privilege game is started. When the effect image indicating the effect is displayed in the display area of the image display body 500, the type of the bonus game estimated in the bonus game type determination process in step S500 is any one of the patterns 9 to 24. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged before the start of the bonus game by making it difficult for the player to grasp the game, and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest when operating the start lever 210 at which the bonus game is started Becomes

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are stopped in a state where the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are rotating, a certain amount of time is required after the stop operation is performed. The reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped within the time (for example, within four symbols after the stop operation is performed), and the result of the main lottery is displayed. On the other hand, in the pseudo game, even if the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are not stopped (regardless of whether the stop operation is performed), the rotating reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, and the result of the pseudo lottery is performed. Is displayed. However, in the pseudo game, based on the stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, the spinning reels 301a, 301b, 301c may be stopped to display the result of the pseudo lottery. . However, in this case, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that are being rotated are stopped regardless of whether or not within a predetermined time after the stop operation (for example, within four symbols after the stop operation). Thus, the result of the pseudo lottery may be displayed. That is, after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop operation, the spinning reels 301a, 301b, and 301c may be stopped to display the result of the pseudo lottery. As a result, even when the result of the pseudo lottery is displayed based on the stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination in the pseudo lottery is always displayed. Becomes As a result, even when the result of the pseudo lottery is displayed based on the stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination in the pseudo lottery is always displayed. Becomes

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the privilege game to be executed is uniquely determined by the processing of the effect control boards 510 and 520 from among the seven privilege games having different degrees of profit for the player (the main board 409). (Regardless of the processing on the side). However, it is not always necessary to determine the bonus game to be executed independently by the processing of the effect control boards 510 and 520, and the special game to be executed is determined based on the information transmitted from the main board 409 by the processing of the effect control boards 510 and 520. May be determined by the For example, when determining a bonus game to be executed on the effect control boards 510, 520 based on the result information of the pseudo lottery transmitted from the main board 409 to the effect control boards 510, 520, the command is transmitted. This corresponds to making it easier to determine a bonus game advantageous to the player when the winning pseudo combination is Cherry 2 than when Cherry 1 is used.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the type of the bonus game recognized on the main board 409 side is such that the combination of “White Seven” symbols is stopped and displayed in the middle row and the combination of “BAR” symbols in the middle row. Is the only one that is stopped. On the other hand, the types of privilege games determined by the effect control boards 510 and 520 are seven types, which are larger than the number of privilege games recognized by the main board 409. This makes it possible to increase the variations of the privilege game while reducing the control load on the main board 409. That is, when the type of the bonus game is determined on the main board 409 side as in the related art, the number of condition devices increases as the number of types of the bonus game increases, so that the number of combinations of lottery data and symbols increases. The control load on the main board 409 increases. Further, when the number of combinations of symbols increases, the number of stop control patterns of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c also increases. Furthermore, when the number of combinations of symbols increases, the variation of the number of stop appearances is also restricted, and there is a possibility that the interest may be further reduced. In this regard, as in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by determining the type of the bonus game on the effect control boards 510 and 520, the control load on the main board 409 can be reduced. However, in a gaming machine represented by a slot machine, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, information can be transmitted from the main board to the effect control board, but information can be transmitted from the effect control board to the main board. Since it is configured not to be able to transmit, if the type of the bonus game is determined on the effect control boards 510 and 520, the type of the bonus game determined on the effect control boards 510 and 520 is determined on the main board 409 side. There is a problem that it becomes impossible to grasp. If the type of the bonus game determined on the side of the effect control boards 510 and 520 cannot be grasped on the side of the main board 409, for example, an effect using reels cannot be performed, and the variation of the effect is restricted. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the bonus game type determination process (step S500), the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control boards 510 and 520 can be grasped on the main board 409 side. It is. In this way, the type of the bonus game to be executed is determined by the effect control boards 510, 520, and the determined type of the bonus game is determined from the effect control boards 510, 520 to the main board 409 side. By making it possible to estimate by the main board 409 while transmission is not possible, it is possible to execute a variety of effects while reducing the control load of the main board 409, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(Another example of processing that can be influenced by the main board side on the processing performed as the effect control board side processing)
As another specific example, for example, a high-accuracy A state, a high-accuracy B state, a high-accuracy C state, and a normal state are prepared as a plurality of states having different winning probabilities in the pseudo game execution lottery, and the effect control boards 510 and 520 are provided. Determines one of these states. The special game state determination processing described above determines which of the high-accuracy A state, the high-accuracy B state, the high-accuracy C state, and the normal state is determined as the processing on the effect control boards 510 and 520 side. By performing the same processing, estimation is performed on the main substrate 409 side. The main board 409 performs a pseudo game execution lottery based on the estimation result. For example, when the main board 409 estimates that the state determined as the processing of the effect control boards 510 and 520 is the high-accuracy A state, the main board 409 performs a pseudo game execution lottery with a winning probability of 204/256, and When it is estimated to be in the B state, a pseudo game execution lottery is performed with a winning probability of 128/256, and when it is estimated to be in the highly accurate C state, a pseudo game execution lottery is performed with a winning probability of 64/256, When it is estimated that the game is in the normal state, the pseudo game execution lottery is performed with a winning probability of 8/256. By doing so, the main board 409 side can influence the processing performed as the processing on the effect control boards 510 and 520 such as the lottery of the bonus game. As a result, in the related art, the degree of advantage for the player in the bonus lottery of the bonus game can be realized only by showing, for example, a display effect, but according to the present embodiment, the behavior of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c Can be realized.

  The main board 409 can influence the processing performed as the processing on the effect control boards 510 and 520, but is not limited to the above-described lottery of the bonus game. For example, whether or not to control to the specialization zone is determined as the processing of the effect control boards 510 and 520, and this determination is performed on the main board 409 by performing the same processing as the above-described bonus game type determination processing. Based on this assumption, the present invention can be applied to a case where the main board 409 plays a pseudo game so as to increase the appearance frequency of the opportunity to add the bonus game.

  Also, assuming that the main board 409 can influence the processing performed as the processing on the effect control boards 510 and 520, the number of bonus games is determined as the processing on the effect control boards 510 and 520. The determined number of games is estimated on the main board 409 side by performing the same processing as the above-described bonus game type determination processing, and the number of bonus game games determined as processing on the effect control boards 510 and 520 is determined. , The processing on the main board 409 side can be performed so as to affect the additional lottery of the bonus game. For example, as the processing on the effect control boards 510 and 520, the number of bonus games is determined to be one of 10, 30, and 50 games, and when the main board 409 is estimated to be 10 games, 8/256. If the main board 409 side is estimated to be 30 games, the pseudo game execution lottery is performed with a winning probability of 64/256, and if the main board 409 side is estimated to be 50 games. When the pseudo game execution lottery is performed with a winning probability of 128/256, the number of bonus games determined as the processing of the effect control boards 510 and 520 can be significantly increased. When the main board 409 side is estimated to be 10 games, a pseudo game execution lottery is performed with a winning probability of 128/256, and when the main board 409 side is estimated to be 30 games, a pseudo-game execution lottery is performed with a winning probability of 64/256. If a game execution lottery is performed, and if the main board 409 side is estimated to be 50 games, a pseudo game execution lottery is performed with a winning probability of 8/256, a bonus game determined as a process on the effect control boards 510 and 520 side is performed. The more the number of games is detrimental to the player, the more the result can be to the advantage of the player.

  In addition, as a specific example of the processing that can be influenced by the main substrate 409 side as the processing performed as the processing on the effect control substrates 510 and 520, the main substrate 409 is a processing on the effect control substrates 510 and 520 side. The item determined in the performed processing is estimated, and the winning probability of the pseudo game execution lottery is changed based on the estimated state. Instead, or in addition, the main board The winning probability in the additional lottery of the bonus game may be changed based on the result state estimated by the 409 side. That is, the frequency at which the bonus game is added, the frequency at which the bonus game is provided, and the like may be increased as a result.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a game in which only the main game is provided alone is progressed every time a predetermined amount of medals are consumed, When a symbol combination appears, a specific type of privilege is awarded ", and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (each condition for performing step S340 (eg, YES in step S322) is satisfied). ), The main game and the pseudo game are sequentially provided in a predetermined order (see FIG. 78) without requiring additional consumption of medals, and the same applies when a specific symbol combination appears in the pseudo game. Since there is a possibility that a special type of privilege (addition of a privilege game, etc.) may be given to the game, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. To become.

  Incidentally, in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, the addition of the bonus game is a bonus that can be given according to the result of the pseudo game, but the bonus is not limited to this. You may make it give as a privilege. -A state of being in a chance state (for example, a high-precision gaming state or a specialization zone) in which the frequency of additional lottery or grant lottery is increased or the probability of winning in such lottery is increased. Transition ・ Transition to AT game or privilege game

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment, at least a part of the main control data used for the control of the main game (for example, when the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started). By using the control data and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) as pseudo control data used for control of the pseudo game, it is difficult to distinguish the game from the main game, and the pseudo game is performed. I have to. Thus, it is possible to always provide the pseudo game secretly while only the main game is provided alone, and the plurality of symbol rows (reels 301a, 301b, 301c) are rotated. Each time, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the pseudo game is being performed.

  In view of such an object, a stop control mode (for example, a reel corresponding to cherry 1) used to end the rotation state while a specific symbol (for example, cherry 1) is allowed to appear in this game. A stop control table) and a swing control mode (for example, a reel swing control corresponding to cherry 1) used to end the rotation state while a specific symbol (for example, cherry 1) is allowed to appear in the pseudo game. It is more preferable that the contents (the number of design slips (the number of pull-in) at the time of the stop operation, etc.) are the same also for the table).

  That is, in this case, after the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated to stop, the rotation state of the reel 301 of the type corresponding to the stop operation ends (if this game is a stop state, it may be a pseudo game). The behavior of the reels 301 until the swinging state is changed is the same between when the game is being played and when the pseudo game is being played. Therefore, after the rotation of each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started, at least one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is stopped, and the rotation state of the reel 301 of the type corresponding to the stop operation ends ( It is preferable to maintain a state in which it is difficult to know which of the present game and the pseudo game is being performed until immediately before the game is stopped, and in the case of the pseudo game, the swing fluctuation state). Will be able to

  In order to make it difficult to distinguish between the present game and the pseudo game, the type of the symbol that can appear (shake fluctuation) in the pseudo game is the same as the type of the symbol that can appear (stop state) in the present game. In addition to the above, when the same type of symbol appears, it is more preferable that the same privilege can be given.

  However, in the swing control mode (for example, a reel swing control table corresponding to cherry 1) used when terminating the rotating state while a specific symbol (for example, cherry 1) is allowed to appear in the pseudo game. Is a stop control mode (for example, a reel stop control table corresponding to cherry 1) used to end the rotation state while a specific symbol (for example, cherry 1) is allowed to appear in this game. This is effective in that it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a pseudo game will be performed due to a sense of incongruity that can rarely occur during a stop operation.

  In addition, the type of the symbol that can appear (shake fluctuation) in the pseudo game does not necessarily need to completely match the type of the symbol that can appear (stop state) in the present game. A special symbol type that may fluctuate) may be prepared. For example, by giving a special privilege that cannot be obtained in the present game when a special symbol type appears, it is possible to greatly increase a sense of expectation that a pseudo game will be performed. It is effective in point.

  In addition, as described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment, as apparent from FIGS. 50 and 76, the pseudo lottery is more related to the granting of the privilege (here, the addition of the privilege game) than the main lottery. The probability of obtaining a lottery result that allows a symbol (a rare symbol such as cherry 1) to appear can be increased. That is, in this case, when the pseudo game is performed, it is possible to cause the rare symbol to appear with a higher probability than in the case where the main game is performed, and a certain fixed symbol set for each type of the rare symbol that can be appeared. An additional lottery (effect control board 510) is performed based on the privilege provision probability. Therefore, when the pseudo game is played, it is possible to expect that the privilege is given (in this case, the bonus game is added) with a higher degree of expectation than when the present game is played.

  However, the additional lottery performed on the effect control board 510 side in response to the result that a specific symbol (for example, Cherry 1) can appear in the processing (the main lottery or the pseudo lottery) on the main board 409 side Irrespective of the result of the main lottery or the pseudo lottery, the lottery is performed based on one lottery probability defined for each type of symbol that can be appeared, This is important to make the player realize the merits of increasing the rare symbol appearance rate in the pseudo game. That is, regardless of which of the present game and the pseudo game is being performed, the degree of added expectation at the time of the additional lottery is set to be constant for each symbol (a rare symbol such as cherry 1). Thus, it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game by performing the pseudo game in which the symbols (rare symbols such as cherry 1) can appear at a high frequency.

  In this case, for the player, the appearance of the symbol when any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is stopped in the rotating state of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c indicates that the pseudo game is being executed. Is the greatest concern (whether fluctuation). As a result, in the case of swing fluctuation, it is recognized that the pseudo game is being played, and in ending the rotation state of the remaining two reels, a privilege is given (here, a bonus game is added). Can be aimed with a high sense of expectation of a symbol combination (rare symbol such as cherry 1) related to (1).

  Considering that such a technology is provided, the cherry 1 is a so-called corner cherry that can appear only on the reel 301a among the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. A so-called double cherry or triple cherry that can appear over an effective line (a line including a portion where a corner cherry appears) of a reel (for example, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c) is a so-called double cherry or triple cherry. In this lottery, the probability of being able to appear in this lottery is lower, but when the above-mentioned cherry 2 is allowed to appear, the privilege is given with a higher probability than when the above-mentioned cherry 1 is allowed to appear (here. Then, it is desirable that the bonus game be added). Further, in the pseudo game, a game mode (such as a probability in a pseudo lottery) in which when an angular cherry appears, it is more likely to develop into a so-called double cherry or triple cherry than in the present game. It is more desirable to set it as follows.

  According to such a configuration, when the corner cherry appears, the stop operation for terminating the rotation state of the remaining two reels (shake fluctuation) depends on whether or not the cherry is fluctuating. It is possible to make the expectations for the development of continuous cherries and triple cherries (further, the expectations for the addition of a bonus (in this case, the addition of a bonus game)) completely different.

  Further, as described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, only when the pseudo game is being executed between the main game and the pseudo game, the slot machine 1 performs the predetermined operation after the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are rotated. If any of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is not stopped within the time, the rotation state of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is automatically terminated (a symbol due to swing fluctuation) without waiting for the stop operation. Like that. That is, in this case, the player can check whether or not the pseudo game is provided each time, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved through the provision of the pseudo game.

  In addition, when the pseudo game is being played, in consideration of such control for automatically ending (appearing symbols due to swing fluctuation), the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, If it is possible to make an effect prompting not to perform the stop operation of any of the 211c, it can be used as one of the effects whether or not a fluctuation appears after a predetermined time has elapsed. Can be expanded. For example, if the player does not want to see such an effect, it is possible to avoid such an effect by operating the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c at an early stage.

  Further, if the control is performed during the above-described super-speed period in which the control is performed so that the pseudo game can be successively digested while maintaining the high digestion speed, the stop operation is not performed within the predetermined time. Sometimes, by automatically terminating the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (appearing symbols due to fluctuations), the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can also function as a configuration that helps maintain their high digestion speed.

  Further, as described above, in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the pseudo game continues in one game (that is, as the number of consecutive winnings in the in-game continuous lottery increases), the player has Controlled as a prosperity state in which the degree of advantage is increased (internal lottery probability (probability of awarding a bonus when a specific symbol (rare symbol such as cherry 1) appears) gradually increases). It is also possible. In the case where control is performed in such a prosperous state, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are newly rotated after it is confirmed that swing fluctuations have occurred in the previous game (confirmation of the pseudo game). In the state where the state is set, it is extremely important to determine whether or not the swing fluctuation appears again when any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is stopped (the internal lottery probability can be further increased). It can be positioned as an effect element for determining whether or not the prosperity prosperity state continues.

  Moreover, when any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is first stopped, in addition to providing such important effect elements, it is possible to grasp that the prosperity prosperity state continues in this way. After that, when terminating the rotation state of the remaining two reels, the production information (information on whether or not a privilege is given) on whether or not the additional lottery has been won is provided (or, respectively). At any one of the timings described above), it is possible to make the stop operation for the symbol row after the control of the prosperity prosperity state interesting.

  Also, as the control relating to this swing fluctuation, instead of the swing fluctuation of reciprocating the symbol in the horizontal direction from the position according to the stop operation by the player, the symbol is vertically shifted from the position according to the stop operation by the player. It is desirable to realize the reciprocating pitch fluctuation. That is, in this case, if the prosperity prosperity state is continued, the symbol will be repeatedly displaced upward in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the stop operation by the player, so that the inner lottery probability is higher and higher. Being in a possible state (continuation of the probable prosperity state) is embodied by the appearance of the symbol (pitch fluctuation), and when the prosperity probable state has been terminated, the stop operation by the player is performed. By continuing to stop the symbol at the corresponding fixed position, the fact that the inside lottery probability is returned to the certain probability (that the prosperity prosperity state has been terminated) is determined by the appearance mode of the symbol (fixed stop). It will be embodied. Therefore, the player can recognize whether or not the prosperity prosperity state is continuing from the behavior when the symbol appears, and is interested in the stop operation on the symbol sequence after being controlled to the prosperity prosperity state. Can be provided.

In the case where such a prosperity prosperity state can be created as the slot machine 1, a period (probability prosperity) in which the degree of advantage for the player tends to be increased as the pseudo game continues in one game. State) and a period in which the degree of advantage for the player is not increased no matter how long the pseudo game continues in one game (a state in which the normal pseudo game is continuously performed). It may be used properly depending on the situation (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the state is controlled to a prosperity prosperity state). However, in this case, while the above-mentioned pitch fluctuation appears when the probability is in a prosperity state, it is possible to cause other fluctuation fluctuation when the normal pseudo game is merely performed continuously. desirable. Further, during the period in which the state is controlled to the prosperity prosperity state, it is desirable to increase the probability of winning in the in-game continuous lottery so that the pseudo game is easily performed continuously.

  Incidentally, as the swing fluctuation, the manner of displacement in the forward direction (upward) and the manner of displacement (speed or the like) in the reverse direction (downward) may be made different. Further, the manner of displacement and the manner of fluctuation (speed or distance) of the swing fluctuation itself may be varied according to the degree of expectation.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment, after a specific symbol combination once appears (shake fluctuation) as a result of the execution of the pseudo game, control for automatically changing the symbol combination to a different symbol combination is performed. Is also possible.

  When performing the processing related to such automatic change, at each timing when the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are respectively stopped, the reel combination control table in the reel swing control table is displayed separately for each of the reels. It is desirable to perform control for automatically changing to a predetermined combination of symbols of an automatic change destination. That is, in this case, for example, the processing in steps S4216, S4234, and S4250 can be realized separately for the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. Alternatively, after YES in the process of step S4218 (see FIG. 81), a step of automatically changing the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c collectively to the symbol combination of the automatic change destination predetermined in the reel swing control table. This may be realized by creating a new process.

  Here, for example, the following methods can be adopted as the method for such automatic change. a. When a specific symbol combination (rare symbol such as cherry 1) that can appear as a result of the pseudo lottery cannot be caused to appear due to a bad stop operation performed by the player, as a result of the pseudo lottery Method of automatically changing to a suitable symbol combination that can be appeared b. After a specific symbol combination (rare symbol such as cherry 1) that can appear as a result of the pseudo lottery is caused to appear by a stop operation by the player, a symbol combination (logo) having a higher game value (such as an additional probability) is displayed. Automatically change to a rare design such as c. After a specific symbol combination (rare symbol such as cherry 1) that can appear as a result of the pseudo lottery is caused to appear by a player's stop operation, a symbol combination (losing) with a lower game value (addition probability, etc.) Etc.)

  Among these, when the above-mentioned technique a is adopted, a game that is maintained during the super-high speed period described above, in which control is performed to maintain a high digestion speed and allow the pseudo game to be digested one after another, is maintained. It is particularly effective in doing so. That is, in such a super-high-speed period, there is a concern that a case in which the eyesight fails may easily occur as the pursuit of increasing the digestion speed of the pseudo game is increased. In this regard, if the technique a is adopted, a symbol combination different from the symbol combination according to the result of the pseudo lottery occurs because the stop operation for each symbol row (reel 301a, 301b, 301c) fails during the super-speed period. Even if it appears (fluctuation fluctuation), the symbol combination that appeared can be automatically changed to an appropriate symbol combination according to the result of the pseudo lottery, so that the digestion speed of the pseudo game is maximized without fear of such failure. This will encourage the pursuit of heightening.

  When the above-mentioned method a is adopted, a false stop operation mode (push order, timing, etc.) in which a symbol combination different from an appropriate symbol combination according to a result of the pseudo lottery is intentionally made to appear is navigated. It is desirable. In other words, in this case, the effect control board 510, 520 side manages whether or not the false stop operation mode is intentionally caused to appear, so that the frequency at which such automatic change control is performed can be appropriately adjusted. become. For example, when the digestion speed per game is lower than a predetermined lower limit speed, by not navigating such a false stop operation mode (push order, timing, etc.), The operation rate as the slot machine 1 can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned method a or the above method b is adopted, it is desirable to increase the probability of winning the additional lottery when the automatic change is made, or to make sure that the extra lottery is added in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  On the other hand, when the above-mentioned technique c is adopted, the movement of the symbol related to such automatic change can be canceled by the operation of the player side, and the automatic change to the symbol combination having a low game value (addition probability, etc.) is automatically performed. It is desirable to be able to obstruct. As a method of realizing such control related to the cancellation, is there any operation on various operation means that can be detected on the main board 409 side, such as the start lever 210 and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c. It will be performed based on whether or not. For example, if there is no operation on the specific operation means that can be detected on the main board 409 side, the movement of the symbol that is to be automatically changed to a symbol combination (losing, etc.) having a lower game value (addition probability, etc.) is left as it is. While maintaining the control, if there is an operation on a specific operation means that can be detected on the main board 409 side, it is automatically changed to a symbol combination (losing, etc.) having a lower game value (addition probability, etc.). The control of stopping the movement of the symbol to be made is stopped halfway, and the control is returned to the point where the fluctuation of the specific symbol combination (rare symbol such as cherry 1) appears.

  Alternatively, the starting lever 210 is used as an operating means that can be detected on the main board 409 side, and the movement of the symbol which is to be automatically changed to a symbol combination (losing, etc.) having a lower game value (addition probability, etc.). When the start lever 210 is operated in the state where the symbol is displayed, control is performed to temporarily return to a position where a specific symbol combination (a rare symbol such as the cherry 1) appears, and then the reels 301a, 301b and 301c are newly rotated. If the control for setting the state is performed, the movement of the symbol related to the automatic change can be canceled while the function (start of rotation) as the starting lever 210 is secured.

  When the methods a to c relating to the automatic change are employed, at least during the period in which the pseudo game is being performed, the control (such as the additional lottery) related to the privilege provision is not performed based on the result of the pseudo lottery. It is desirable to perform control (such as an additional lottery) relating to awarding of a privilege based on a symbol combination that has appeared as a result of the pseudo game, in order to improve the game entertainment. In other words, in this case, for example, in the case of automatically changing to a symbol combination (losing, etc.) having a lower game value (addition probability, etc.), an unfavorable game result will actually occur unless canceled by the player's operation. Will be obtained. In addition, although the game is automatically changed to an appropriate symbol combination, if a false stop operation mode (push order, timing, and the like) is not automatically changed as it is navigated, an adverse game result is actually obtained. It will be possible to realize novel playability.

  By the way, in the slot machines including the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, if the specific game digestion time is not consumed (time-up by the wait timer) after the start of the main game, the next main game is executed. In many cases, control that does not start is performed. In addition to this, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, similarly, when a pseudo game is being played, a specific game digestion time is consumed (time by the pseudo wait timer) after the start of the pseudo game. If it is not, the control is performed so that the next game (the main game or the pseudo game) is not started, so that it is difficult to recognize that the pseudo game is being performed. Further, if the specific game digestion time is not consumed (time-up by the pseudo wait timer) after the start of the game, the pseudo game as the next game is not started.

  In this regard, in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, the restricted game for starting a new game (the main game or the pseudo game) under such restrictions is always provided to the player. In the control, an unlimited lottery is performed as to whether or not to be restricted. As the unrestricted lottery, for example, when it is determined that the logo can appear (fluctuation fluctuation) as a result of the pseudo lottery on the main board 409 side, it is determined that the above restriction is not applied. It is possible to

  Then, when it is determined that the above-mentioned restriction is not applied in the unlimited lottery, a process of increasing the winning probability in the in-game continuous lottery (step S3424) is first performed (at least 50% is reduced). It is desirable that the pseudo game be easily repeated many times in one game.

That is, in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the unlimited lottery in the pseudo lottery (whether or not a logo can appear) is won, the pseudo game receiving the result of the pseudo lottery is consumed (step S3422). Until the above-mentioned in-game continuation lottery (step S3424) is performed after that, processing for increasing the winning probability in the in-game continuation lottery (step S3424) is performed. Then, in such a situation, when winning in the in-game continuous lottery (step S3424), it is possible to release the restriction based on the specific game digestion time, maintain the high digestion speed, and successively digest the pseudo game. The control is performed during the above-described super-speed period in which the control is performed.

  In such a super-high-speed period, regardless of the type of the symbol combination that appears due to the stop operation by the player, the execution of the medal payout process is always omitted, and the process of losing the medal payout process can realize high-speed digestion. Environment in which only pseudo-games are repeated), start new pseudo-games one after another even if the specific game digestion time has not elapsed, and grant special benefits to each of the pseudo-games started Control is performed so that each possible opportunity is obtained. In other words, in this case, while ensuring basic playability such as "an opportunity to give a privilege is given each time the game is played," the type of the symbol combination that appeared in each game (whether there are many medals paid out or not) , Etc.), the next game start time is not delayed, so that the desired digestion speed can be maintained and the game can be digested one after another, thereby appropriately maintaining the gaming interest. Will be done.

  The super fast period is continued until the period in which the pseudo game is repeatedly executed in one game ends (until the in-game continuation lottery in which the winning probability has been changed is lost). Then, as long as the period is continued, every time the pseudo game is performed, control is performed so that the pseudo game can be successively digested while maintaining a high digestion speed without being limited by a specific game digestion time. Will be done. On the other hand, if the player loses in the in-game continuous lottery (step S3424) within the super-speed period, the super-speed period is ended, and the game is returned to the state limited by the specific game consumption time. The winning probability in step S3424) is also returned to the original probability.

  When the control is performed during such a super-high speed period, it is desirable that the player be notified that the game is in a special game state. This makes it easier for the player to pursue increasing the digestion speed of each game within the super-speed period, so that the operation rate of the slot machine 1 is reduced even though the pseudo game is frequently performed. It becomes possible to suppress the situation from becoming worse.

  Further, the trigger for shifting to the super speed period is not limited to the pseudo lottery as long as it is a lottery on the main board 409 side, and the shift to the super speed period may be performed based on the result of the main lottery. In addition to the end condition of the super fast period, in addition to losing to the in-game continuous lottery, a predetermined time limit is timed up, or a specific result is obtained in a pseudo game or pseudo lottery. You may make it complete | finished based on it.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reel swing processing of each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is performed in the pseudo game. Here, the reel swing processing of each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c in step S4216, step S4234, and step S4250 is performed by swinging of one step or less (for example, 0.5 step) by the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c including the stepping motors. ) Is preferably performed.

  In the reel swing processing of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are first stopped, for example, within 500 msec (this position is set as an initial position), and then a predetermined number of steps are performed. It is preferable to stop the movement within 500 msec after moving in the direction of, and then move in the opposite direction by the number of moved steps. For example, in a pseudo game, when the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c vibrate all the time when a super rare small role (for example, a logo) having a relatively high degree of advantage for the player appears, the super rare small role is greatly reduced. Despite the appearance, the player may have a feeling of anxiety that, for example, re-fluctuation may be performed. In this regard, by stopping the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c within, for example, 500 msec, thereafter moving the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c in one direction by a predetermined number of steps, and then in the opposite direction by the number of moved steps, For example, it is possible to reduce a sense of anxiety given to the player such as a re-change. Note that, in the above-described embodiment, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are moved around the initial position because they do not move in the direction opposite to the one direction based on the initial position. Good.

  Further, when the reel swing processing of each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is performed, it is preferable that the number of steps for moving each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is within a range not exceeding a half of one symbol. This is because if the reel swing processing of each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is performed in a range exceeding one half of one symbol, the stop position of the symbol becomes unclear.

  When the reel swing processing is performed on each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are moved several steps in one direction and in the opposite direction without stopping for example within 500 msec as described above. When the moving process is repeatedly performed, the movement of each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be made smoother than in a swing process including a stop within 500 msec, for example.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reel swing processing of each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is performed in synchronization. However, when trying to move the plurality of reels 301a, 301b, 301c in synchronization, it is necessary to perform different processing for reel swing processing when the first stop reel stops and reel swing processing for stopping the second stop reel. is there. In other words, the reel swing processing at the time of stopping the first stop reel need only be performed after the first stop reel has stopped. However, the reel swing processing at the time of stopping the second stop reel requires that the first stop reel be stopped. Waiting for is added. Therefore, in order to synchronize the first stop reel and the second stop reel, it is difficult to provide a predetermined time such as 500 mes when the first stop reel stops. Therefore, when the plurality of reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are moved synchronously, it is preferable that the predetermined time such as 500 mes is set through the stop time and the swing time.

  In the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment, both the pseudo game and the main game are performed in one game, but one pseudo game is counted as one game, and the number of such games is counted. May be output from the outer edge plate. If the above pseudo game is adopted, the number of games counted per unit time is likely to be smaller than before, so for example, in a slot machine equipped with a ceiling function, the time until reaching the ceiling is longer than before. May be longer, and the interest may decrease. In this regard, although the main game and the pseudo game are performed in one game, the number of pseudo games as well as the number of main games is counted as the number of games and output from the outer edge version to suppress a decrease in interest. can do.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by making it difficult to distinguish the present game from the pseudo game, the appearance probability of the rare small role that is originally difficult to appear (in the case of the present game) is raised. Is to be achieved. However, in a specific case such as the above-mentioned super-speed period, for example, a period in which a player can be excited by creating a pseudo game in which the appearance probability of a rare small role is high is created. be able to.

  Also, in the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment, in the pseudo game, a pseudo wait timer similar to the wait timer in the present game is measured, and when the pseudo wait timer times out, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are used. It starts to rotate. However, since the number of games executed per unit time may be reduced compared to the conventional game by employing the pseudo game, if the start lever 210 is operated without timing the pseudo wait timer in the pseudo game. The rotation of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c may be started immediately. In this way, not only can the number of games that can be executed per unit time be reduced, but also the annoyance that the rotation of each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is not immediately started even though the start lever 210 is operated. It is also possible to do. In addition, as a means for suppressing a decrease in the number of games that can be executed per unit time, the frequency at which the pseudo game is performed may be lower than the combined winning probability of the rare small wins.

  Further, for example, in a case where a pseudo game is performed based on the result of the main lottery in the normal state (general state, normal RT), it is preferable that an effect indicating the result of the main lottery is performed in the pseudo game. By doing so, when a role that has a higher degree of profit for the player than the number of appearances (symbol combinations) appearing in the pseudo game is won in the main lottery, the more the pseudo game is continued, the higher the expectation is raised. be able to. For example, if a lottery is won for a logo that has a high profit level for the player, cherry 1 appears in the first pseudo game, watermelon appears in the second pseudo game, and cherry 2 appears in the third pseudo game. Each time a pseudo game is played before this game, such as the appearance of a game, the degree of advantage for the player is gradually increased, so that an effect that suggests the result of this lottery can be performed. It becomes possible.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the information communication from the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 to the main board 409 is not performed, the main board 409 can refer to the navigation lottery table in FIG. Based on the bell counter and whether or not the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the activated line, the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 by executing the game a plurality of times is determined. By narrowing down in stages, it is possible to finally determine the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520. Further, when the game is executed a plurality of times, the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520 is gradually narrowed down. (If the game is executed a plurality of times), it is determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 based on the pressing order and the result of whether or not the specific symbol is displayed over the plurality of games. It is possible to guess the type of the bonus game.

  That is, although the processing content (for example, the type of the bonus game) determined on the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 side cannot be grasped on the main board 409 side, the determination processing on the main board 409 side is performed. It can be said that the processing that can affect the effect can be executed on the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 side.

  However, the processing performed on the main board 409 side is not limited to the extent that the processing on the production control board 510 or the production control board 520 affects the determination processing on the main board 409 side. The determination may be made on the substrate 510 or the effect control substrate 520 side. To be more extreme, regardless of the type of the bonus game executed by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520, the control content to be executed on the main board 409 side is determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 side. can do. Although the information determined in the processing of the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 cannot be grasped on the main board 409 side, the same processing as the bonus game type determination processing is performed, so that the information is executed by the main board 409. The content of the control to be performed can be determined by the processing on the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 side. This is effective, for example, when it is desired to reduce the control load on the main board 409.

(Modification)
In the present embodiment, as can be seen from the navigation lottery table of FIG. 58, the bell counter, the result of the internal lottery (any of “AT2-1” to “AT5-4”), and the effect Based on the type of the bonus game determined by the control board 510 or the effect control board 520, whether or not to perform the navigation in the push order in which the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the activated line is uniquely determined. . In this case, when the game is performed a plurality of times, it is possible to enjoy the pleasure of estimating the type of the privilege game determined by the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520, but it is not always necessary to enjoy the effect control board 510 and the effect. It is not always better to be able to guess the type of privilege game determined by the control board 520. In such a case, a navigation lottery table different from that of FIG. 58 is prepared, and at least once between the bell counters 1 to 4, it is determined which of these navigation lottery tables is to be adopted. It is preferable to determine the execution of the push order navigation using the determined navigation lottery table. This has the effect of preventing the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 from being seen by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 409 determines whether or not the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the pay line, thereby determining whether or not the push control navigation has been performed by the effect control board 510. In a round game, there are two choices. That is, when there are more than two types of bonus games, if the main board 409 determines which type of bonus game is to be executed, a plurality of games are performed as in the above-described embodiment. It is necessary to squeeze step by step. However, if only two types of privilege games are prepared, for example, the main board 409 determines whether or not the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the activated line as in the present embodiment. Also, the type of the privilege game determined to be executed in one game can be determined without performing the game a plurality of times. Further, even when the number of types of privilege games is more than two, for example, and when it is determined to execute one of the two or more types of privilege games, the number of types of privilege games is one. If the number of game types can be reduced to the same number or more, it is possible to determine the type of the bonus game that is determined to be executed in one game without performing a plurality of games. For example, when it is determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 that any one of the privilege games of the A-pattern to the F-pattern is to be executed, when the A-pattern is determined, the push is performed in order and the B-pattern is determined. When the pattern is determined, press the scissors. When the pattern is determined, press the middle. When the pattern is determined, press the middle and reverse. When the pattern is determined, press the reverse. When the pattern is determined, select the F. When the push is navigated in the pushing order by the effect control board 510, the main board 409 sets the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 to 1 based on the order of the stop operation. The determination can be made in the game of the times.

  In addition, the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 is determined by a plurality of times as to whether a specific symbol combination (in this embodiment, the symbol combination of the accessory 17) is displayed on the activated line. Even in the case where the determination is made by playing a game, it is not always necessary to narrow down stepwise as in the present embodiment. For example, when a plurality of games are played, a combination of ○ and X (a combination of whether or not a specific symbol is displayed) in the first to Nth games (N is an integer of 2 or more) is used. The type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 can be determined by the main board 409.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the type of the bonus game determined by the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520 is determined based on whether or not a specific symbol combination (the symbol combination of the accessory 17) is displayed on the activated line. But not limited to this. For example, when a plurality of winning combinations are won in the internal lottery, a winning combination (a winning combination corresponding to a symbol combination to be displayed on the activated line) is navigated by the effect control board 510 to a symbol combination actually won. Based on the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520, the type of the privilege game may be determined. In addition, the symbols attached to the reels are divided into a plurality of zones, and in which zone the stop operation should be performed (the timing of the stop operation) is navigated by the effect control board 510, and the symbols actually stopped and displayed are displayed. May be determined based on which zone the symbol belongs to, to the effect control board 510 or the effect control board 520. Further, navigation is performed by the effect control board 510 such that a stop operation is performed at a timing at which a specific slip table is adopted among a plurality of prepared slide tables, and based on the actually adopted slide table, the effect control board 510 is used. Alternatively, the type of the privilege game determined by the effect control board 520 may be determined.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control board 510 receives a command from the CPU 1110 of the main board 409, and the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520 perform two-way communication. , But is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the effect control board 520 receives a command from the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 and the effect control board 510 and the effect control board 520 perform bidirectional communication, so that the effect control board 520 controls various effect operations. It may be.

  The slot machine 1 described in the embodiment for carrying out the invention can be expressed as the following technical idea.

  The gaming machine (slot machine 1A) of the technical concept 1 starts a game among a storage means (main substrate 409) capable of storing game media (medals and stored credits) and a game medium stored in the storage means. MAX input means (first MAX input button 206, second MAX input button 2000) capable of inputting a game medium necessary for playing the game, and based on that the game medium is input by operating the MAX input means. Betting number setting means (betting number setting processing at the time of medal insertion) capable of setting the betting number, and betting number display means (first BET lamp 604, 414) capable of displaying that the betting number has been set by the betting number setting means. A second BET lamp 2010) and a display mode control unit (second MAX input button effect determination process, gaseous second MAX input button) for controlling the display mode of the bet amount display unit. Effect determination processing and first MAX input button effect determination processing), wherein the MAX input means includes a first MAX input means (first MAX input button 206) that can be operated by a player; A second MAX input unit (second MAX input button 2000) that can be operated by the player only when a specific condition is satisfied, and wherein the first MAX input unit and the second MAX input unit Is operated, the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, and the bet number display means is configured to determine whether or not the gaming medium has been inserted by at least the first MAX insertion means. A first bet amount display means (first BET lamp 604) capable of displaying that the bet number has been set, and the gaming medium is inserted by at least the second MAX insertion means. Second bet number display means (second bet lamp 2010) capable of displaying that the bet number has been set based on the above. The bet number setting means operates the first MAX insertion means. The normal setting means (the normal mode described in the embodiment) for immediately setting the number of bets based on the fact, and the second MAX insertion means which can be operated based on the satisfaction of the specific condition are operated. Sometimes, the special setting means (the specific mode described in the embodiment, that is, the slow BET pattern) that sets the bet number by delaying from the operation without immediately setting the bet number as set by the normal setting means. Display mode), and wherein the display mode control means sets the second bet based on the bet amount set by the special setting means based on satisfaction of the specific condition. Delay means for delaying the timing at which the betting number display means is displayed, based on the betting number set by the normal setting means, relative to the timing at which the first betting number display means is displayed (described in the embodiment) A specific mode, that is, a display mode of a slow BET pattern) and a case where a predetermined operation is performed while the display timing of the multiplier displayed on the second bet amount display unit by the delay unit is delayed. Is characterized by having delay end means (for displaying a slow BET pattern) for immediately terminating the delay.

  The insertion of the game medium indicates that, for example, the MAX input button (the first MAX input button 206, the second MAX input button 2000) is pressed, and the stored credit is consumed. Further, the present invention has at least two types of MAX insertion buttons. Basically, when the first MAX insertion button 206 is pressed and the bet amount is set, the set bet amount is set to the first BET. Displayed on lamp 604. The second MAX input button (second MAX input button 2000) can be operated only when specific conditions are satisfied, and the second MAX input button 2000 is pressed to set the bet amount. Then, the second BET lamp 2010 is displayed in a specific mode.

  As a normal mode, the bet amount is set immediately when the first MAX insertion button 206 is pressed, and the first BET lamps 614a to 614c (three-slot slot) are set almost simultaneously with the setting of the bet number. In a machine, there are usually three BET lamps). Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, after the pressing operation of the MAX input button (the pressing operation of the BET button may be either the first MAX input button 206 or the second MAX input button 2000), Turns on the second BET lamps 2010a to 2010c in different specific modes.

  In the specific mode, even if the game medium is inserted, the number of bets is not set immediately, but the display mode control means (the second MAX input button effect determination process, the second MAX input button effect determination process, and the second In one MAX insertion button effect determination process), the time when the 1 BET flag is turned ON is delayed, and the time when the 2 BET flag is turned ON and the time when the 3 BET flag is turned ON are respectively delayed. Here, the specific conditions include, for example, a case where the player has won the ART game in the game immediately preceding the game or a case where the player has won the extra lottery of the ART game, but is not necessarily limited to the result of the internal lottery. It is only necessary that a condition favorable to the player is satisfied before the game.

  In addition, even when the pressing operation of the second MAX input button 2000 becomes possible due to the establishment of the specific condition, the pressing operation of the first MAX input button 206 may be performed. However, when the first MAX input button 206 is pressed, the pressing operation of the second MAX input button 2000 becomes impossible, and when the second MAX input button 2000 is pressed, the pressing operation of the first MAX input button 206 is performed. Impossible. In this case, it is preferable that the second BET lamps 2010a to 2010c be turned on in a specific mode even when the first MAX input button 206 is pressed. In a specific mode, both the first BET lamps 614a to 614c and the second BET lamps 2010a to 2010c may be turned on. In this case, at least the lighting timing of the first BET lamp 614c and the second BET lamp It is necessary to synchronize the lighting timing of 2010c. This is because the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated when either the first BET lamp 614c or the second BET lamp 2010c is turned on. It is preferable that the lighting of the BET lamps be performed in synchronization with the lighting of the first BET lamps 614a to 614c and the lighting of the second BET lamps 2010a to 2010c.

  The timing at which the second BET lamps 2010a to 2010c are turned on based on the fact that the betting number is set by the special setting means based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, that the betting number is set by the normal setting means If the start lever 210 is operated as a predetermined operation while the first bet amount display means is turned on with a delay from the timing at which the first bet amount display means is displayed based on the above, the mode is terminated (already started). The lit BET lamp remains lit), the bet number is set immediately, or the previously set but frozen bet number setting is enabled, and the unlit second BET lamp is set according to the bet number. 2010a to 2010c are turned on. That is, by operating the start lever 210 during the slow BET effect, the slow BET effect is immediately terminated, and the operation of the start lever as the start of the game is enabled. The player can start the game by operating the start lever 210 again.

  As a result, the player can continue the game with a sense of expectation even in the monotonous operation of each game called the BET operation, and can also suppress a decrease in interest caused by an excessively performed effect. .

  The above is one mode of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine other than a slot machine, for example, a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

1, 1A Slot machine 10 Gap 21 Transparent plate 50 Model unit 90 Front opening / closing member 100 Outer body 100a Rotating shaft 101 Bottom plate 102 Side plate 102a Convex portion 102b Guard portion 103 Top plate 104a Heat radiating port 104b Code outlet 105 Partition plate 106 Projection 107 Attachment piece 108 Attachment piece 109 Opening 110 Medal discharging device 110a Main body 110b Hopper 110c Discharge port 110d Overflow gutter 110e Payout sensor 111 Gaming medal auxiliary storage box 111a Medal full sensor 112 Power supply 112a Device case 112b Top plate 112c Rear plate 112d Front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Vent hole 112h Leg 112i Ventilation space 112j Step 112k Mounting piece 112m Projection 112m-1 Projection 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 11 2s Substrate 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Mounting tool 119 Main body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector board 123 Connector board 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 Opening 128 Supporting tube 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent 200 Door-shaped front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 202 Operation unit 203 Medal slot 205 One slot button 206 MAX slot Button (first MAX input button)
207 Medal selector 207a Solenoid 207b Insertion sensor 208 Medal return button (payment button)
209 Storage release switch 210 Start lever 211a Left reel stop button 211b Middle reel stop button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medal gutter 213 Return gutter 214 Transparent window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Supporting piece 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitting body 217a-1 Light source 217a-2 Light guide plate 217b Reflecting member 218 Fixing member 219 Groove 300 Symbol variation display device 301a Left reel 301b Middle reel 301c Right reel 302 Device case 303 Drive means 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate portion 305 Top plate portion 306 Right side plate 307 Left side plate 308 Rear plate 309 Upper swash plate 310 Lower swash plate 311 Handle 312 Reel board 313 Cable 315 Retainer 316 Handle 32 a to 321c Reel band 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Symbol display window 402 Reinforcement bar 402a Guide portion 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcement member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main board 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Recessed step 413 Tapered part 414 Wheel 415 Flange 416 Hook part 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fixing member shelf 420 Hinge bracket 420a Member 420b Rotating member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Bearing piece 420g Overlapping area 420h Overlapping area 420h Overlapping area 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 42 Handle port 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connector 427a Play hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receiving cylinder 430 Through hole 431 Mounting piece 432 Button type panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Claw piece 436 Finger hook 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 Lock hole 443 Skylight 444 Reinforcement band 449 Main board 500 Image display body 500s Dashed area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 Lighting device 503 Substrate 505 Translucent lid plate 506 Tube frame 507 Translucent cover 508 Receiver 509 Engagement control board 512 Speaker 600 Upper rail 601 Fixed member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start Lamp 610 Lamp 614 Lamp (BET lamp)
614a First BET lamp 614b First BET lamp 614c First BET lamp 616 Credit display LED
623a Right-down line 523b Right-up line 700 Recorder 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Prevention piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hook wall 703 Stop shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Knob 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM,
1116 Input / output interface 1130 Input / output interface 1200 Hall computer 2000 Second MAX input button 2010 BET lamp 2010a Second BET lamp 2010b Second BET lamp 2010c Second BET lamp 2020 Rendering lamp 2030 Rendering accessory

Claims (1)

A specific operation means for executing a game,
First display means for performing a display prompting a specific operation of the specific operation means,
Lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether to give a benefit advantageous to the player,
A privilege granting means for granting the privilege when a lottery result of granting the privilege is obtained by the lottery means;
And a movable body,
Before the display prompting the said first display means is performed, it has been made so as to be displayed at a different second display means and Jo Tokoro display mode is the first displaying means,
To grant the privilege by the privilege granting means, as a pattern of a predetermined display mode of the second display means to said prompting display is performed on the first display means, the display mode before Kisho constant first There is a pattern performed in time and a pattern performed in a second time longer than the first time,
Even if the pattern of the predetermined display mode of the second display means until the prompting display is performed on the first display means is a pattern performed in the first time, the pattern displayed in the second time is a pattern performed in the second time. Even if there is, the predetermined display mode displayed on the second display means changes before the time until the prompting display is performed on the first display means changes,
Even if the pattern of the predetermined display mode of the second display means until the prompting display is performed on the first display means is a pattern performed in the first time, the pattern displayed in the second time is a pattern performed in the second time. Even if there is a pattern of the predetermined display mode of the second display means is the first time, the first time is, and if the pattern of the predetermined display mode of the second display means is the second time, In a predetermined time after the lapse of the second time, it is possible to maintain the result of the lottery of the lottery means shown,
A plurality of second times longer than the first time are provided,
There is a third display unit different from the first display unit and the second display unit, and the display mode on the third display unit changes in accordance with the predetermined display mode displayed on the second display unit. Has been made,
A gaming machine characterized in that the movable body can be moved at a predetermined timing until the prompting is displayed on the first display means .